Mvd 2700 руководство пользователя

Configuration and Use Manual

P/N 20000326, Rev. EC

November 2016

Micro Motion

®

Model 2700

Transmitter with

F

OUNDATION™

fieldbus

Configuration and Use Manual

Contents

Chapter 1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Flowmeter documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Communication tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Out-of-service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Planning the configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Chapter 2 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Applying power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Assigning function block channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Configuring the integrator function block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Configuring pressure compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

2.5.1

Pressure compensation values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2.5.2

2.5.3

Enabling pressure compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Configuring a pressure source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Configuring temperature compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.6.1

Enabling external temperature compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.6.2

Configuring a temperature source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Zeroing the flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.7.1

2.7.2

2.7.3

Preparing for the zeroing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Zero procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Restoring zero values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Chapter 3 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

3.6

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Characterization, Smart Meter Verification, meter validation, and calibration . . . . . . 23

3.2.1

3.2.2

Characterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Smart Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

3.2.3

3.2.4

Meter validation and meter factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

3.2.5

Comparison and recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Performing a characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.3.1

3.3.2

Characterization parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

How to characterize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Performing Smart Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3.4.1

Preparing for the Smart Meter Verification test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3.4.2

3.4.3

3.4.4

Running the Smart Meter Verification test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Reading and interpreting Smart Meter Verification test results . . . . . . . . 35

Setting up automatic or remote execution of the Smart Meter Verification test 40

Performing meter validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Performing a density calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

3.6.1

Preparing for density calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Configuration and Use Manual

iii

Contents

3.7

3.6.2

Density calibration procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Performing a temperature calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Chapter 4 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Configuration map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Configuring standard volume flow measurement for gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

4.3.1

Configuring gas density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Changing the measurement units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Creating special measurement units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Configuring the petroleum measurement application (API feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

4.6.1

About the petroleum measurement application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

4.7

4.6.2

Configuration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Configuring the concentration measurement application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4.7.1

4.7.2

About the concentration measurement application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Configuration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

4.8

4.9

Changing the linearization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Changing the output scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

4.10

Changing process alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

4.10.1

Alarm values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

4.10.2

4.10.3

Alarm priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Alarm hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

4.11

Configuring status alarm severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

4.12

Changing the damping values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

4.12.1

Damping and volume measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

4.13

Changing slug flow limits and duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

4.14

Configuring cutoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

4.14.1

Cutoffs and volume flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

4.15

Changing the flow direction parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.16

Changing device settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

4.17

Configuring sensor parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4.18

Changing the display functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

4.18.1

4.18.2

4.18.3

4.18.4

Enabling and disabling display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Changing the scroll rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Changing the update period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Changing the display password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

4.18.5

4.18.6

Changing the display variables and precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Changing the display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

4.19

Configuring write-protect mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

4.20

Enabling LD Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Chapter 5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Viewing process variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

5.2.1

5.2.2

Viewing API process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Viewing concentration measurement process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

5.3.1

Fieldbus simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

5.3.2

Sensor simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Responding to alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

5.4.1

5.4.2

Viewing alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Acknowledging alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Using the totalizers and inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

iv

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Contents

5.5.1

5.5.2

Viewing the totalizers and inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Controlling the totalizers and inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.6

6.7

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Guide to troubleshooting topics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Transmitter does not operate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Transmitter does not communicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.4.1

National Instruments basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Zero or calibration failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

AI block configuration error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Output problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

6.7.1

6.7.2

6.7.3

6.7.4

Damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Flow cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Output scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Characterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

6.7.5

6.7.6

Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Fieldbus network power conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

6.8

6.9

6.7.7

Linearization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

EEPROM Checksum Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Status alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

6.10

Diagnosing wiring problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

6.10.1

6.10.2

6.10.3

6.10.4

Checking the power-supply wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Checking the sensor-to-transmitter wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Checking the grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Checking the communication wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6.11

Checking slug flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6.12

Restoring a working configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

6.13

Checking the test points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

6.13.1

Obtaining the test points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

6.13.2

6.13.3

6.13.4

6.13.5

Evaluating the test points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Excessive drive gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Erratic drive gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Low pickoff voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

6.14

Checking the core processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

6.14.1

Exposing the core processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

6.14.2

6.14.3

Checking the core processor LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Core processor resistance test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

6.15

Checking sensor coils and RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

6.15.1

9-wire remote or remote core processor with remote transmitter installation

6.15.2

136

4-wire remote or integral installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Appendix A PlantWeb Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

A.1

A.2

A.3

PlantWeb Alerts explained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Setting PlantWeb Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Using PlantWeb Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Appendix B Model 2700 transducer blocks reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

B.1

B.2

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

B.1.1

Transducer block names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Configuration and Use Manual

v

Contents

B.3

B.4

B.5

B.6

B.7

B.8

CALIBRATION transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

API transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Appendix C Model 2700 Resource Block Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

C.1

C.2

Resource block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Resource block views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Appendix D Flowmeter installation types and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

D.1

D.2

D.3

Installation diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Component diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Wiring and terminal diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Appendix 2 Connecting with the Field Communicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

2.1

2.2

2.3

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Viewing the device descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Connecting to a transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Appendix 3 Connecting with ProLink II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

ProLink II configuration upload/download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Connecting from a PC to a Model 2700 transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

3.4.1

Connecting to the service port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

ProLink II language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Appendix 4 Using the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Using the optical switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Using the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

4.4.1

4.4.2

4.4.3

4.4.4

Display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Viewing process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Using display menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Display password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

4.4.5

Entering floating-point values with the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Appendix 5 NE53 history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

5.1

Software change history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

vi

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Contents

Configuration and Use Manual

vii

viii

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Chapter 1

Before You Begin

1.1

Overview

This manual describes the procedures required to start, configure, use, maintain, and troubleshoot

Micro Motion

®

Model 2700 transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus.

Many procedures assume your transmitter is connected to an enhanced core processor. Some procedures may function differently or be unavailable if your transmitter is not connected to an enhanced core processor.

1.2

Safety

Safety messages are provided throughout this manual to protect personnel and equipment. Read each safety message carefully before proceeding to the next step.

1.3

Flowmeter documentation

Table 1-1

Flowmeter documentation resources

Topic

Installing the sensor

Installing the transmitter

F

OUNDATION

fieldbus function block reference documentation

Document

Sensor installation manual

Micro Motion Model 1700 and Model 2700 Transmitters:

Installation Manual

F

OUNDATION

Fieldbus Blocks

(available via the Rosemount web site at http://www.rosemount.com)

1.4

Communication tools

Most of the procedures described in this manual require the use of a communication tool. Three communication tools are referred to in this manual:

• Fieldbus host – There are a number of available fieldbus hosts. In this manual, the Field

Communicator is assumed to be the host. Other hosts, such as DeltaV, provide functionality that is very similar to that of the Communicator. Basic information on the Field Communicator

is provided in Appendix 2. For more information, refer to the Field Communicator

documentation, which is available online (www.fieldcommunicator.com).

All fieldbus hosts require appropriate device description (DD) files in order to communicate with and configure the transmitter. DD files are available from the Products section of the

Micro Motion web site (www.micromotion.com).

Configuration and Use Manual

1

Before You Begin

•

ProLink II – Basic information on ProLink II is provided in Appendix 3.

IMPORTANT: The Model 2700 FOUNDATION fieldbus transmitter works with ProLink III. The procedures in this document are for ProLink II. For information about configuration using ProLink

III, refer to the Model 2700 configuration manual, available on the Micro Motion web site

(www.micromotion.com).

•

Display – Basic information on using the display is provided in Appendix 4.

1.5

Out-of-service mode

Fieldbus function blocks may need to be placed in Out-of-service (O/S) mode before you modify their parameters. The procedures in this manual assume that, if necessary, function blocks have been put in

O/S mode prior to starting the procedure, and that they will be placed back in service (i.e., Auto mode) after the procedure is complete.

ProLink II automatically handles function block modes.

1.6

Planning the configuration

The ISA configuration worksheet at the end of this chapter provides a place to record information about your flowmeter (transmitter and sensor) and your application. This information will affect your configuration options as you work through this manual. Fill out the configuration worksheet and refer to it during configuration. You may need to consult with transmitter installation or application process personnel to obtain the required information.

2

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Before You Begin

Configuration and Use Manual

3

FIELDBUS INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET

NO BY DATE REVISION

SHEET

SPEC. NO.

CONTRACT

REQ. — P.O.

BY CHK’D

OF

REV.

DATE

APPR.

1 Meter Tag No.

2 Service

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

5

6

3 Location

4

FLUID

PIPE

DATA

Calibrated Flow Range, Units

Max Velocity, Units

Min. Flow

Min. Pressure

Min. Temp.

Max. Flow

Max. Pressure

Max. Temp.

Spec. Gravity or Density (max)

Velocity (max)

Operating Flow

Operating Press.

Operating Temp.

OPERATING

CONDITIONS

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

31

32

33

34

35

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

FLOW

SENSOR

Pipe Material

Pipe Size Upstream/Dnstream

Schedule

Special Insulator

Process Connections

Approval

Wetted Parts

Mass Flow Accuracy @ Max

Density Accuracy @ All Rates

Pressure Drop @ Max Flow

Calibration Type

Cal. Rate Cal. Units

Custom Calibration Points

Dens. for Vol.to Mass Conv.

Spec. Unit Text Totalizer Text

Base Flow Unit Base Time Unit

Conversion Factor

Warning

Instrument Tag Number

48

49

50

51

44

45

46

47

40

41

42

43

36

37

38

39

TRANS.

Transmitter Style

Mass Unit

Dens. Unit

Volume Unit

Temp. Unit

Display

Safety

Conduit Adapters

Type

Input Signal

Baud Rate

Physical Media

Power Supply

Power Cons. on FF Bus

Input Voltage

Device Class

Min. VCRs

Electrical Class

Device Function Block Fixed Type

Resource Block (RB)

Transducer Block (TB)

Analog Input Block (AI)

Analog Output Block (AO)

Electronic microprocessor based

F

OUNDATION

fieldbus™ H1 ISA.50.02 IEC-61158

31.25 Kbps

Twisted pair wires, (H1) compliant

9–32 VDC, bus powered, 4 wires

11.5 milliamps maximum

Model 2700: 18–100 VDC or 85–265 VAC

Link master

20

FISCO

F

OUNDATION

Exec. time

Exec. time

ITK 4.60 minimum

Other

fieldbus™ FF-891/FF-892 compliant

18 ms

18 ms

FUNCTION

BLOCKS

52

53

54

55

56

57

Discrete Input Block

Discrete output Block

PID Block (PID)

Integrator Block (INT)

Instantiable Function Blocks

Transducer Block Type

Exec. time

Exec. time

Exec. time

Exec. time

Model 2700: DO/DI

Measurement TB

Local Display TB

Enhanced Density TB

16 ms

16 ms

20 ms

18 ms

DIAGNOSTICS 58

NOTES:

Diagnostic TB

1 – The vendor must provide the Device Description according with the firmware revision of the field device.

2 – It is mandatory to provide the Capability Format File for each type of device.

3 – All devices must show F

OUNDATION

™ logo.

Calibration TB

Device Information TB

API TB

FOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOT FOR

ISSUE.

Chapter 2

Startup

2.1

Overview

This chapter describes the procedures you should perform the first time you start up the flowmeter.

You do not need to use these procedures every time you cycle power to the flowmeter.

The procedures in this section will enable you to:

•

Apply power to the flowmeter (Section 2.2)

•

Check the analog input (AI) function blocks channels and change if required (Section 2.3)

•

Check the integrator (INT) function block mode and configure if required (Section 2.4)

•

Configure pressure compensation (optional) (Section 2.5)

•

Configure temperature compensation (optional) (Section 2.6)

•

Zero the flowmeter (optional) (Section 2.7)

• 1. Check the Analog Output (AO) function Block channels and change if required —

(Section 2.3)

• 2. Check the Discrete Input (DI) Function Block channels and change if required —

(Section 2.3)

• 3. Check the Discrete Output (DO) Function Block channels and change if required —

(Section 2.3)

Note: All procedures provided in this chapter assume that you have established communication with

the transmitter and that you are complying with all applicable safety requirements. See Appendices 2

and 3.

2.2

Applying power

Before you apply power to the flowmeter, close and tighten all housing covers.

WARNING

Operating the flowmeter without covers in place creates electrical hazards that can cause death, injury, or property damage.

Make sure safety barrier partition and covers for the field-wiring, circuit board compartments, electronics module, and housing are in place before applying power to the transmitter.

Turn on the electrical power at the power supply. The flowmeter will automatically perform diagnostic routines. If the transmitter has a display, the status LED will turn green and begin to flash when the transmitter has finished its startup diagnostics.

Configuration and Use Manual

5

Startup

Note: If this is the initial startup, or if power has been off long enough to allow components to reach ambient temperature, the flowmeter is ready to receive process fluid approximately one minute after power-up. However, it may take up to ten minutes for the electronics in the flowmeter to reach thermal equilibrium. During this warm-up period, you may observe minor measurement instability or inaccuracy.

2.3

Assigning function block channels

The four AI function blocks and the AO function block may be assigned to one transducer block

channel each. The default channel configuration for each block is shown in Table 2-1.

Table 2-1

Default channel configuration

Block

AI 1

AI 2

AI 3

AI 4

AO

AO

DO

DI

Default channel

1 (mass flow)

2 (temperature)

3 (density)

4 (volume flow)

6 (pressure)

7 (Temperature)

8 (Start Sensor Zero)

9 (Forward/Reverse Indication

)

Units

l/s psi

°C g/s

°C g/cm

3

If you need to change the channel configuration you must use a fieldbus host. Refer to Figure 2-1 and

Table 2-2.

Figure 2-1

Assigning function block channels – Fieldbus host

AI or AO

AI Channel or AO Channel

Transducer Scale: Units Index

Output Scale: Units Index

AI Channel

AO Channel

– Set to the transducer block channel this block should report.

– Set to the transducer block channel this block should report.

Transducer Scale: Units Index – Change the units (if necessary).

Output Scale: Units Index – If you change the units for Transducer Scale: Units Index, then change the units here as well to match.

6

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Startup

DI or DO

DI Channel or DO Channel

DI Channel

DO Channel

– Set to the transducer block channel this block should report.

– Set to the transducer block channel this block should report.

Configuration and Use Manual

7

Startup

Table 2-2

Available transducer block channels

Channel number

31

32

33

34

35

36

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

1

2

20

21

22

3

4

5

13

(2)

14

(2)

15

(2)

16

(2)

17

(2)

18

(2)

19

(3)

6

7

(1)

8

(1)

9

(1)

10

(1)

11

(1)

12

(2)

Process variable

Mass Flow

Temperature

Density

Volume Flow

Drive Gain

Pressure

API Corr Density

API Corr Volume Flow

API Avg Corr Density

API Avg Corr Temp

API CTL

ED Ref Density

ED Specific Gravity

ED Std Vol Flow

ED Net Mass Flow

ED Net Vol Flow

ED Conc

ED Baume

Std Gas Volume Flow

Temperature

SNS Actual Flow Direction

SNS ZeroInProgress

SYS AnalogOutputFault

SNS MVFailed

Start Sensor Zero

Reset Mass Total

Reset Volume Total

Reset API Reference (Standard) Volume Total

Reset All Process Totals (not Inv)

Reset ED Reference Volume Total

Reset ED Net Mass Total

Reset ED Net Volume Total

Start/Stop All Totals (includes Inv)

Increment ED Curve

Reset Gas Standard Volume Total

Start Meter Verification in Continuous

Measurement Mode

(1) Channels 7 through 11 are not selectable unless the petroleum measurement application is enabled.

(2) Channels 12 through 18 are not selectable unless the concentration measurement application is enabled.

(3) Channel 19 is selectable only if gas standard volume measurement is enabled (see Section 4.3).

Function block

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Output

Discrete Input

Discrete Input

Discrete Input

Discrete Input

Discrete Output

Discrete Output

Discrete Output

Discrete Output

Discrete Output

Discrete Output

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Output

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Input

Analog Input

Discrete Output

Discrete Output

Discrete Output

Discrete Output

Discrete Output

Discrete Output

8

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Startup

2.4

Configuring the integrator function block

The behavior of the INT function block can be configured in two ways:

• Mode – The INT function block mode can be configured as:

Standard, which provides standard fieldbus INT function block behavior

—

Any of the values in Table 2-3, which cause the INT function block to pass through the

specified totalizer value from the MEASUREMENT transducer block

• Resetting – The INT function block can be configured for manual or automatic resetting when a setpoint is reached.

You can only configure the INT function block using a fieldbus host (Figures 2-2 and 2-3).

Figure 2-2

Configuring INT function block mode – Fieldbus host

MEASUREMENT

Integrator FB Configuration

Integrator FB Configuration

– Set to the desired INT function block mode (see Table 2-3).

Table 2-3

INT function block modes

This mode:

Standard

Internal mass total

Internal volume total

Internal mass inventory

Internal volume inventory

Internal gas volume total

Internal gas volume inventory

Internal API volume total

Internal API volume inventory

Internal CM standard volume total

Internal CM standard volume inventory

Internal CM net mass total

Reports the value of this parameter:

Transducer block

None

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

PETROLEUM

MEASUREMENT

PETROLEUM

MEASUREMENT

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

Parameter

None — standard F

OUNDATION

fieldbus

INT block behavior

Mass Total: Value

Volume Total: Value

Mass Inventory: Value

Volume Inventory: Value

Gas Volume Total: Value

Gas Vol Inventory: Value

API Corr Volume Total: Value

API Corr Vol Inventory: Value

CM Std Volume Total: Value

CM Std Vol Inventory: Value

CM Net Mass Total: Value

Configuration and Use Manual

9

Startup

Table 2-3

INT function block modes

This mode:

Internal CM net mass inventory

Internal CM net volume total

Internal CM net volume inventory

Reports the value of this parameter:

Transducer block

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

Parameter

CM Net Mass Inventory: Value

CM Net Volume Total: Value

CM Net Vol Inventory: Value

Figure 2-3

Configuring manual or automatic resetting – Fieldbus host

INT

Integration Type

Total Setpoint

Integration Type – Set to manual or automatic resetting.

Total Setpoint – For automatic resetting, the value at which the totalizer will be reset.

2.5

Configuring pressure compensation

Due to process pressure change away from calibration pressure, there can be a change in sensor flow and density sensitivity. This change is called pressure effect. Pressure compensation corrects for these changes.

Not all sensors and applications require pressure compensation. Contact Micro Motion Customer

Service before you configure pressure compensation.

Configuring pressure compensation requires three steps:

1. Determining pressure compensation values (Section 2.5.1)

2. Enabling pressure compensation (Section 2.5.2)

3. Selecting a pressure source (Section 2.5.3)

10

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Startup

2.5.1

Pressure compensation values

You need the following values for pressure compensation:

•

Fixed or current pressure —

• Flow calibration pressure — The pressure at which the flowmeter was calibrated. Refer to the calibration document shipped with your sensor. If the data is unavailable, use 20 psi (1.4 bar).

• Flow factor — The flow factor is the percent change in flow rate per psi. Consult the product data sheet for your sensor for this value. You will need to reverse the sign of the flow factor.

For example, if the flow factor in the product data sheet is –0.001% per psi, the pressure compensation flow factor would be +0.001% per psi.

• Density factor — The density factor is the change in fluid density, in g/cm

3

per psi. Consult the product data sheet for your sensor for this value. You will need to reverse the sign of the density factor. For example, if the density factor in the product data sheet is –0.00004 g/cm

3 per psi, the pressure compensation flow factor would be +0.00004 g/cm

3

per psi.

2.5.2

Enabling pressure compensation

You can enable pressure compensation with a fieldbus host or ProLink II. You will need the values of

the three pressure compensation values from Section 2.5.1.

Figure 2-4

Pressure compensation – Fieldbus host

CALIBRATION

Pressure Comp

Flow Factor

Density Factor

Flowcal Pressure

Pressure Comp – Set to Enable.

Flow Factor

Density Factor

– Set to the specified value (in percent per psi) from the sensor product data sheet

(reverse the sign).

– Set to the specified value (in g/cm

3

per psi) from the sensor product data sheet

(reverse the sign).

Flowcal Pressure – Set to the pressure at which the sensor was calibrated.

Figure 2-5

Pressure compensation – ProLink II

1. Enable and configure the pressure compensation for your transmitter by navigating to View >

Preferences.

2. Select Enable External Pressure Compensation.

3. Select Apply.

4. Navigate to ProLink > Configuration.

5. Select the Pressure tab.

Configuration and Use Manual

11

Startup

6. Enter the following values:

• Flow factor

• Dens factor

• Cal pressure

7. Select Apply.

2.5.3

Configuring a pressure source

You will need to choose one of two sources for pressure data:

• Analog Output function block — This option allows you to poll for pressure data from an external pressure source.

• Fixed pressure data — This option uses a known, constant pressure value.

Note: If you configure a fixed pressure value, ensure that it is accurate. If you configure polling for pressure, ensure that the external pressure measurement device is accurate and reliable.

Using the Analog Output function block

You must use a fieldbus host to set up the AO function block. To set up the AO function block as a pressure source, connect the AI block of the pressure measurement device to the AO block of the

transmitter (Figure 2-6).

Figure 2-6

External pressure source – Fieldbus host

AO Channel

Process Value Scale: Units Index

AI AO

Cascade

Input

Output

AO Channel – If changed from the default, reset to Pressure (value = 6).

Process Value Scale: Units Index – Change the units to match the pressure sensing device.

Using fixed pressure data

You can set up fixed pressure data with a fieldbus host (Figure 2-7) or ProLink II (Figure 2-8). You

must enable external pressure compensation before you can set the fixed pressure value (see

Section 2.5.2).

12

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Startup

Figure 2-7

Fixed pressure data – Fieldbus host

CALIBRATION

Pressure: Value

Pressure: Value – Set to the appropriate fixed pressure value.

Figure 2-8

Fixed pressure data – ProLink II

Apply

2.6

Configuring temperature compensation

External temperature compensation can be used with the petroleum measurement application or the concentration measurement application:

• If external temperature compensation is enabled, an external temperature value (or a fixed temperature value), rather than the temperature value from the Coriolis sensor, is used in petroleum measurement or concentration measurement calculations only. The temperature value from the Coriolis sensor is used for all other calculations.

• If external temperature compensation is disabled, the temperature value from the Coriolis sensor is used in all calculations.

Configuring temperature compensation requires two steps:

1. Enabling external temperature compensation (Section 2.6.1)

2. Configuring a temperature source (Section 2.6.2)

2.6.1

Enabling external temperature compensation

You can enable temperature compensation with a fieldbus host (Figure 2-9) or ProLink II

(Figure 2-10).

Configuration and Use Manual

13

Startup

Figure 2-9

Temperature compensation – Fieldbus host

CALIBRATION

Enable Temperature Compensation

Enable Temperature Compensation – Set to Enable.

Figure 2-10

Temperature compensation – ProLink II

14

2.6.2

Configuring a temperature source

You will need to choose one of two sources for temperature data:

• Analog Output function block — This option allows you to poll for temperature data from an external temperature source.

• Fixed temperature value — This option uses a known, constant temperature value.

Note: If you configure a fixed temperature value, ensure that it is accurate. If you configure polling for temperature, ensure that the external temperature measurement device is accurate and reliable.

Using the Analog Output function block

You must use a fieldbus host to set up the AO function block. To set up the AO function block as a temperature source, connect the AI block of the temperature measurement device to the AO block of

the transmitter (Figure 2-11).

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Startup

Figure 2-11

External temperature source – Fieldbus host

AO Channel

Process Value Scale: Units Index

AI AO

Cascade

Input

Output

AO Channel – Set to External Temperature

(value = 20).

Process Value Scale: Units Index – Change the units to match the temperature sensing device.

Using fixed temperature data

You can set up fixed temperature data with a fieldbus host (Figure 2-12) or ProLink II (Figure 2-13).

You must enable external temperature compensation before you can set the fixed temperature value

(see Section 2.6.1).

Figure 2-12

Fixed temperature data – Fieldbus host

CALIBRATION

External Temperature: Value

External Temperature: Value – Set to the appropriate fixed temperature value.

Figure 2-13

Fixed temperature data – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Enter value in External

Temperature box

Temperature tab

Apply

Configuration and Use Manual

15

Startup

2.7

Zeroing the flowmeter

Zeroing the flowmeter establishes the flowmeter’s point of reference when there is no flow. The meter was zeroed at the factory, and should not require a field zero. However, you may wish to perform a field zero to meet local requirements or to confirm the factory zero.

When you zero the flowmeter, you may need to adjust the zero time parameter. Zero time is the length of time the transmitter takes to determine its zero-flow reference point. The default zero time is

20 seconds.

• A long zero time may produce a more accurate zero reference but is more likely to result in zero failure. This is due to the increased possibility of noisy flow, which causes incorrect calibration.

• A short zero time is less likely to result in a zero failure but may produce a less accurate zero reference.

For most applications, the default zero time is appropriate.

Note: Do not zero the flowmeter if a high severity alarm is active. Correct the problem, then zero the

flowmeter. You may zero the flowmeter if a low severity alarm is active. See Section 5.4 for

information about responding to alarms.

16

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Startup

2.7.1

Preparing for the zeroing procedure

To prepare for the zeroing procedure:

1. Apply power to the flowmeter. Allow the flowmeter to warm up for approximately 20 minutes.

2. Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal process operating temperature.

3. Close the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor.

4. Ensure that the sensor is completely filled with fluid and the flow through the sensor has completely stopped.

CAUTION

If fluid is flowing through the sensor, the sensor zero calibration may be inaccurate, resulting in inaccurate process measurement.

To improve the sensor zero calibration and measurement accuracy, ensure that process flow through the sensor has completely stopped.

2.7.2

Zero procedure

You can perform the zero procedure with a fieldbus host (Figure 2-14), the display (Figure 2-15), or

ProLink II (Figure 2-16). If the zero procedure fails, see Section 6.5 for troubleshooting information.

Configuration and Use Manual

17

Startup

Figure 2-14

Zeroing – Fieldbus host

CALIBRATION

Zero Calibration

Zero Calibration – Method parameter that initiates the procedure below.

Zero Calibration

Set flow to zero

Next

Next

Adjust the zero time

Next

Calibration in progress

Next

18

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Startup

Figure 2-15

Zeroing – Display

Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds

Scroll

OFF-LINE MAINT

Select

Scroll

ZERO

Select

CAL ZERO

Select

ZERO/YES?

Select

………………….

• See Section 6.5 for

troubleshooting.

CAL FAIL

Troubleshoot

Select

ZERO

Scroll

EXIT

CAL PASS

Configuration and Use Manual

19

Startup

Figure 2-16

Zeroing – ProLink II

ProLink >

Calibration >

Zero Calibration

Modify zero time if required

Perform Auto Zero

Calibration in Progress

LED turns red

Wait until Calibration in

Progress LED turns green

Red

Troubleshoot

Calibration

Failure LED

Green

Done

• See Section 6.5 for troubleshooting.

• As long as you do not disconnect ProLink II from the transmitter, you can restore the prior zero result.

2.7.3

Restoring zero values

ProLink II has the ability to restore a prior zero result as long as you have not exited the zeroing screen.

In addition, if the transmitter is connected to an enhanced core processor, you will be able to restore

the factory zero. Restoring the factory zero can be accomplished using a fieldbus host (Figure 2-17),

ProLink II (Figure 2-18), or the display (Figure 2-19).

20

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Startup

Figure 2-17

Restoring factory zero – Fieldbus host

DIAGNOSTIC

Restore Factory Zero

Restore Factory Zero – Set this parameter to Restore.

Figure 2-18

Restoring factory zero – ProLink II

ProLink >

Calibration >

Zero Calibration

Restore Factory Zero

Configuration and Use Manual

21

Startup

Figure 2-19

Restoring factory zero – Display

Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds

Scroll

OFF-LINE MAINT

Select

Scroll

ZERO

Select

CAL ZERO

Scroll

RESTORE ZERO

Scroll

EXIT

Select

Current zero display

Scroll

Factory zero display

Scroll

RESTORE ZERO

Scroll

RESTORE EXIT

Scroll Select

Select

RESTORE ZERO/YES?

No

Scroll

Select

Yes

22

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Chapter 3

Calibration

3.1

Overview

This chapter describes the following procedures:

•

Characterization (Section 3.3)

•

Smart Meter Verification (Section 3.4)

•

Meter validation and adjusting meter factors (Section 3.5)

•

Density calibration (Section 3.6)

•

Temperature calibration (Section 3.7)

Note: All procedures provided in this chapter assume that you have established communication with

the transmitter and that you are complying with all applicable safety requirements. See Appendices 2

and 3.

3.2

Characterization, Smart Meter Verification, meter validation, and calibration

There are four procedures:

•

Characterization—adjusts the transmitter to compensate for the unique traits of the sensor with which it is paired

• Smart Meter Verification—establishing confidence in the sensor’s performance by analyzing secondary variables that are highly correlated with flow and density calibration factors

• Meter validation—confirming performance by comparing the sensor’s measurements to a primary standard

• Calibration—establishing the relationship between a process variable (flow, density, or temperature) and the signal produced by the sensor

Meter validation, characterization, and calibration are available on all Model 2700 transmitters. Smart

Meter Verification is available only if the Smart Meter Verification option was ordered with the transmitter.

These four procedures are discussed and compared in Sections 3.2.1 through 3.2.5. Before performing

any of these procedures, review these sections to ensure that you will be performing the appropriate procedure for your purposes.

3.2.1

Characterization

Characterizing the flowmeter adjusts the transmitter to compensate for the unique traits of the sensor it is paired with. Characterization parameters (sometimes called “calibration factors”) describe the sensor’s sensitivity to flow, density, and temperature.

Configuration and Use Manual

23

Calibration

If the transmitter and the sensor were ordered together as a Coriolis flowmeter, then the flowmeter has already been characterized. Under some circumstances (typically when pairing a sensor and transmitter together for the first time), you may need to re-enter characterization data. If you are unsure about whether you should characterize your flowmeter, contact Micro Motion Customer

Service.

3.2.2

Smart Meter Verification

Smart Meter Verification evaluates the structural integrity of the sensor tubes by comparing current tube stiffness to the stiffness measured at the factory. Stiffness is defined as the load per unit deflection, or force divided by displacement. Because a change in structural integrity changes the sensor’s response to mass and density, this value can be used as an indicator of measurement performance. Changes in tube stiffness are typically caused by erosion, corrosion, or tube damage.

Smart Meter Verification does not affect measurement in any way. Micro Motion recommends performing Smart Meter Verification at regular intervals.

3.2.3

Meter validation and meter factors

Meter validation compares a measurement value reported by the transmitter with an external measurement standard. Meter validation requires one data point.

Note: For meter validation to be useful, the external measurement standard must be more accurate than the sensor. See the sensor’s product data sheet for its accuracy specification.

If the transmitter’s mass flow, volume flow, or density measurement is significantly different from the external measurement standard, you may want to adjust the corresponding meter factor. A meter factor is the value by which the transmitter multiplies the process variable value. The default meter factors are

1.0

, resulting in no difference between the data retrieved from the sensor and the data reported externally.

Meter factors are typically used for proving the flowmeter against a weights and measures standard.

You may need to calculate and adjust meter factors periodically to comply with regulations.

3.2.4

Calibration

The flowmeter measures process variables based on fixed points of reference. Calibration adjusts those points of reference. Three types of calibration can be performed:

•

Zero (see Section 2.7)

• Density calibration

• Temperature calibration

Density and temperature calibration require two data points (low and high) and an external measurement for each. Calibration produces a change in the offset and/or the slope of the line that represents the relationship between process density and the reported density value, or the relationship between process temperature and the reported temperature value.

Note: For density or temperature calibration to be useful, the external measurements must be accurate.

Flowmeters are calibrated at the factory, and normally do not need to be calibrated in the field.

Calibrate the flowmeter only if you must do so to meet regulatory requirements. Contact Micro

Motion before calibrating your flowmeter.

24

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

Note: Micro Motion recommends using meter validation and meter factors, rather than calibration, to prove the meter against a regulatory standard or to correct measurement error.

3.2.5

Comparison and recommendations

When choosing among Smart Meter Verification, meter validation, and calibration, consider the following factors:

• Process and measurement interruption

Smart Meter Verification provides an option that allows process measurement to continue during the test.

Meter validation for density does not interrupt the process. However, meter validation for mass flow or volume flow requires process down-time for the length of the test.

Calibration requires process down-time. In addition, density and temperature calibration require replacing the process fluid with low-density and high density fluids, or low-temperature and high-temperature fluids. Zero calibration requires stopping flow through the sensor.

• External measurement requirements

Smart Meter Verification does not require external measurements.

Zero calibration does not require external measurements.

Density calibration, temperature calibration, and meter validation require external measurements. For good results, the external measurement must be highly accurate.

• Measurement adjustment

Smart Meter Verification is an indicator of sensor condition, but does not change flowmeter internal measurement in any way.

Meter validation does not change flowmeter internal measurement in any way. If you decide to adjust a meter factor as a result of a meter validation procedure, only the reported measurement is changed—the base measurement is not changed. You can always reverse the change by returning the meter factor to its previous value.

Calibration changes the transmitter’s interpretation of process data, and accordingly changes the base measurement. If you perform a zero calibration, you can return to the factory zero (or, if using ProLink II, the previous zero). However, if you perform a density calibration or a temperature calibration, you cannot return to the previous calibration factors unless you have manually recorded them.

Micro Motion recommends obtaining the Smart Meter Verification transmitter option and performing

Smart Meter Verification on a regular basis.

3.3

Performing a characterization

Characterizing a flowmeter involves entering parameters that are printed on the sensor tag.

3.3.1

Characterization parameters

The characterization parameters that must be entered depend on the sensor type: “T-Series” or

“Other,” as listed in Table 3-1. The “Other” category includes all Micro Motion sensors except

T-Series.

Configuration and Use Manual

25

Calibration

The characterization parameters are provided on the sensor tag. The format of the sensor tag varies

depending on your sensor’s date of purchase. See Figures 3-1 and 3-2 for illustrations of newer and

older sensor tags.

Table 3-1

Sensor calibration parameters

Characterization data

FCF

FT

FTG

FFQ

DTG

DFQ1

DFQ2

K1

K2

FD

D1

D2

Temp coeff (DT)

(2)

Flow cal

Fieldbus parameter

K1

K2

FD

D1

D2

Temperature Coefficient

Flow Calibration Factor

Flow Calibration Factor

Temperature Coefficient for Flow

T-Series Flow TG Coeff

T-Series Flow FQ Coeff

T-Series Density TG Coeff

T-Series Density FQ Coeff 1

T-Series Density FQ Coeff 2

(1) See the section entitled “Density calibration factors.”

(2) On some sensor tags, shown as TC.

(3) See the section entitled “Flow calibration values.”

T-Series

x x x x x x

Sensor type

Other

x

(1)

x

(1) x

(1) x

(1) x

(1) x

(1)

x

(3) x x x x x x x

Figure 3-1

Sample calibration tags – All sensors except T-Series

Newer tag Older tag

19.0005.13

12502142824.44

0.0010

0.9980

12502.000

14282.000

4.44000

310

19.0005.13

12500142864.44

26

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

Figure 3-2

Sample calibration tags – T-Series sensors

Newer tag Older tag

Density calibration factors

If your sensor tag does not show a D1 or D2 value:

• For D1, enter the Dens A or D1 value from the calibration certificate. This value is the line-condition density of the low-density calibration fluid. Micro Motion uses air.

• For D2, enter the Dens B or D2 value from the calibration certificate. This value is the line-condition density of the high-density calibration fluid. Micro Motion uses water.

If your sensor tag does not show a K1 or K2 value:

•

For K1, enter the first 5 digits of the density calibration factor. In the sample tag in Figure 3-1,

this value is shown as 12500.

• For K2, enter the second 5 digits of the density calibration factor. In the sample tag in

Figure 3-1, this value is shown as 14286.

If your sensor does not show an FD value, contact Micro Motion customer service.

If your sensor tag does not show a DT or TC value, enter the last 3 digits of the density calibration

factor. In the sample tag in Figure 3-1, this value is shown as 4.44.

Flow calibration values

Two separate values are used to describe flow calibration: a 6-character FCF value and a 4-character

FT value. Both values contain decimal points. During characterization, these are entered as a single

10-character string that includes two decimal points. In ProLink II, this value is called the Flowcal parameter; in the Communicator, it is called the FCF for T-Series sensors, and Flowcal for other sensors.

To obtain the required value:

• For older T-Series sensors, concatenate the FCF value and the FT value from the sensor tag, as shown below.

Flow FCF X.XXXX

FT X.XX

• For newer T-Series sensors, the 10-character string is represented on the sensor tag as the FCF value. The value should be entered exactly as shown, including the decimal points. No concatenation is required.

• For all other sensors, the 10-character string is represented on the sensor tag as the Flow Cal value. The value should be entered exactly as shown, including the decimal points. No concatenation is required.

Configuration and Use Manual

27

Calibration

3.3.2

How to characterize

To characterize the flowmeter, enter data from the sensor’s calibration tag into the transmitter

memory. You can characterize the transmitter with a fieldbus host (Figure 3-3) or ProLink II software

(Figure 3-4).

Note: You must configure the sensor type before you enter the characterization parameters.

Figure 3-3

Characterization – Fieldbus host

DEVICE

INFORMATION

Sensor Type Code

Sensor Type Code – Set to Curved Tube or Straight Tube to match sensor type.

28

CALIBRATION

*

*

– Set each of the fieldbus parameters shown in Table 3-1 to the value of the associated sensor data

printed on the sensor’s calibration tag.

Figure 3-4

Characterization – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Device

• Sensor type

Straight tube

Flow

Density

T Series Config

Sensor type?

Flow

Density

Curved tube

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

3.4

Performing Smart Meter Verification

Note: To use Smart Meter Verification, the transmitter must be paired with an enhanced core processor, and the Smart Meter Verification option must be purchased for the transmitter.

3.4.1

Preparing for the Smart Meter Verification test

The Smart Meter Verification procedure can be performed on any process fluid. It is not necessary to match factory conditions.

During the test, process conditions must be stable. To maximize stability:

• Maintain a constant temperature and pressure.

• Avoid changes to fluid composition (e.g., two-phase flow, settling, etc.).

• Maintain a constant flow. For higher test certainty, stop flow.

If stability varies outside test limits, the Smart Meter Verification procedure will be aborted. Verify the stability of the process and retry the test.

Transmitter configuration

Smart Meter Verification is not affected by any parameters configured for flow, density, or temperature. It is not necessary to change the transmitter configuration.

Control loops and process measurement

If the transmitter outputs will be set to Last Measured Value or Fault during the test, the outputs will be fixed for two minutes. Disable all control loops for the duration of the test, and ensure that any data reported during this period is handled appropriately.

3.4.2

Running the Smart Meter Verification test

To run a Smart Meter Verification test, refer to the procedures shown in Figures 3-5, 3-6, 3-7, and 3-8.

Configuration and Use Manual

29

Calibration

Figure 3-5

Smart Meter Verification – Fieldbus host

DIAGNOSTIC

Start On-Line Smart Meter Verification

Start On-Line Smart

Meter Verification

– Method parameter that initiates the procedure below.

Step 1

Set output state (optional)

Step 2

Start/abort procedure

Step 3

Check current algorithm state

Manual abort (optional)

Step 8

Check abort code

Running?

No (=0)

Step 5

Check algorithm abort state

Yes (>0)

Step 4

Read percent complete

No (<16)

Able to complete?

Yes (=16)

CAUTION

No (>0) Within limits?

Yes (=0)

Step 7

Check outlet stiffness

No (>0)

Step 6

Check inlet stiffness

Within limits?

Yes (=0)

PASS

30

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

Table 3-2

Fieldbus host interface for Smart Meter Verification

Step number Step description

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Parameters

Set output state

Start/abort procedure

Read abort code

Block: Diagnostic

Index: 55

Value:

• 0: Last measured value (default)

• 1: Fault

Block: Diagnostic

Index: 54 (Start/Stop Meter Verification)

• 0: Abort

• 1: Start

• 6: Start in Continue Measurement mode

(1)

Check current algorithm state Block: Diagnostic

Index: 57

Read percent complete Block: Diagnostic

Index: 60 (Progress)

Check algorithm abort state

Check inlet stiffness

Block: Diagnostic

Index: 59

Block: Diagnostic

Index: 61

• 0: Within uncertainty limit

• 1: Outside uncertainty limit

Check outlet stiffness Block: Diagnostic

Index: 62

• 0: Within uncertainty limit

• 1: Outside uncertainty limit

Block: Diagnostic

Index: 58

Codes: See Table 3-3

(1) Setting Index 85 (Start On-Line Smart Meter Verification) to 1 is equivalent to setting Index 54 to 6.

Configuration and Use Manual

31

Calibration

Figure 3-6

Smart Meter Verification – ProLink II

Tools >

Meter Verification >

Run Meter Verification

Verify configuration parameters

Next

Enter descriptive data

(optional)

Next

View Previous Results

No

Configuration Changed or Zero Changed?

Yes

View details (optional)

Select output behavior

Start Meter Verification

———————

Yes

Rerun test?

Fail

No

Test result

Abort

Pass

Next

Back

Test result chart

Next

Report

Finish

32

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

Figure 3-7

Smart Meter Verification – Display

Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds

Scroll

ENTER METER VERFY

Select

RUN VERFY

Select

Scroll

RESULTS READ

Select

Scroll

SCHEDULE VERFY

Select

Scroll

EXIT

Scroll Select

Configuration and Use Manual

33

Calibration

Figure 3-8

Smart Meter Verification – Display

CONTINUE MEASR

Select

Scroll

RUN VERFY

Select

OUTPUTS

Select

FAULT

Select

Scroll

EXIT

Scroll

LAST VALUE

Select

Scroll

ARE YOU SURE/YES?

Select

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

x%

Select

SENSOR ABORT/YES?

Scroll Select

PASS VERFY

Scroll

RESULTS VIEW/YES?

Scroll Select

To Runcount

(see Results Read)

Pass Test result

Fail

CAUTION VERFY

Scroll

Abort

ABORTED VERFY

Scroll

Abort Type

Scroll

RERUN/YES?

Yes No

Correct condition

Scroll

To Enter Meter Verfy

Select

EXIT

34

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

3.4.3

Reading and interpreting Smart Meter Verification test results

Pass/Fail/Abort

When the Smart Meter Verification test is completed, the result will be reported as Pass, Fail/Caution

(depending on the tool you are using), or Abort:

• Pass – The test result is within the specification uncertainty limit. In other words, the stiffness of the left and right pickoffs match the factory values plus or minus the specification uncertainty limit. If transmitter zero and configuration match factory values, the sensor will meet factory specifications for flow and density measurement. It is expected that meters will pass Smart Meter Verification every time the test is run.

• Fail/Caution – The test result is not within the specification uncertainty limit. Micro Motion recommends that you immediately repeat the Smart Meter Verification test. If you previously set outputs to Continue Measurement, change the setting to Last Measured Value or Fault.

If the meter passes the second test, the first Fail/Caution result can be ignored.

If the meter fails the second test, the flow tubes may be damaged. Use your process knowledge to determine the possibilities for damage and the appropriate actions for each.

These actions might include removing the meter from service and physically inspecting the tubes. At minimum, you should perform a flow validation and a density calibration.

• Abort – A problem occurred with the Smart Meter Verification test (e.g., process instability).

Abort codes are listed in Table 3-3, and suggested actions are provided for each code.

Table 3-3

Smart Meter Verification abort codes

Abort code

1

3

5

8

13

14

15

Other

Description

User-initiated abort

Frequency drift

High drive gain

Unstable flow

No factory reference data for Smart

Meter Verification test performed on air

No factory reference data for Smart

Meter Verification test performed on water

No configuration data for Smart Meter

Verification

General abort

Suggested action

None required. Wait for 15 seconds before starting another test.

Ensure that temperature, flow, and density are stable, and rerun the test.

Ensure that flow is stable, minimize entrained gas, and rerun the test.

Review the suggestions for stable flow in Section 3.4.1

and rerun the test.

Contact Micro Motion customer service and provide the abort code.

Contact Micro Motion customer service and provide the abort code.

Contact Micro Motion customer service and provide the abort code.

Repeat the test. If the test aborts again, contact

Micro Motion customer service and provide the abort code.

Configuration and Use Manual

35

Calibration

Detailed test data with ProLink II

For each test, the following data is stored on the transmitter:

• Powered-on seconds at the time of the test

• Test result

• Stiffness of the left and right pickoffs, shown as percentage variation from the factory value. If the test aborted, 0 is stored for these values.

• Abort code, if applicable

ProLink II stores additional descriptive information for each test in a database on the local PC, including:

• Timestamp from the PC clock

• Current flowmeter identification data

• Current flow and density configuration parameters

• Current zero values

• Current process values for mass flow rate, volume flow rate, density, temperature, and external pressure

• (Optional) User-entered customer and test descriptions

If you run a Smart Meter Verification test from ProLink II, ProLink II first checks for new test results on the transmitter and synchronizes the local database if required. During this step, ProLink II displays the following message:

Synchronizing x out of y

Please wait

Note: If you request an action while synchronization is in process, ProLink II displays a message asking whether or not you want to complete synchronization. If you choose No, the ProLink II database may not include the latest test results from the transmitter.

Test results are available at the end of each test, in the following forms:

•

A test result chart (see Figure 3-9).

• A test report that includes the descriptive information for the current test, the test result chart, and background information about Smart Meter Verification. You can export this report to an

HTML file or print it to the default printer.

Note: To view the chart and the report for previous tests without running a test, click View Previous

Test Results and Print Report from the first Smart Meter Verification panel. See Figure 3-9. Test

reports are available only for tests initiated from ProLink II.

36

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

Figure 3-9

Test result chart

Initiated from the display or other tool

Initiated from ProLink II

The test result chart shows the results for all tests in the ProLink II database, plotted against the specification uncertainty limit. The inlet stiffness and the outlet stiffness are plotted separately. This helps to distinguish between local and uniform changes to the sensor tubes.

This chart supports trend analysis, which can be helpful in detecting meter problems before they become severe.

Configuration and Use Manual

37

Calibration

Note the following:

• The test result chart may not show all test results, and test counters may not be continuous.

ProLink II stores information about all tests initiated from ProLink II and all tests available on the transmitter when the test database is synchronized. However, the transmitter stores only the twenty most recent test results. To ensure a complete result set, always use ProLink II to initiate the tests, or synchronize the ProLink II database before overwriting occurs.

• The chart uses different symbols to differentiate between tests initiated from ProLink II and tests initiated using a different tool. A test report is available only for tests that were initiated from ProLink II.

• You can double-click the chart to manipulate the presentation in a variety of ways (change titles, change fonts, colors, borders and gridlines, etc.), and to export the data to additional formats (including “to printer”).

• You can export this chart to a CSV file for use in external applications.

Detailed test data with the display

For each Smart Meter Verification test, the following data is stored on the transmitter:

• Powered-on seconds at the time of the test

• Test result

• Stiffness of the left and right pickoffs, shown as percentage variation from the factory value. If the test aborted, 0 is stored for these values.

• Abort code, if applicable

To view this data, see Figures 3-6 and 3-10.

38

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

Figure 3-10

Smart Meter Verification test data – Display

RESULTS READ

Select

RUNCOUNT

x

PASS

Select

xx L STF%

Select

xx R STF%

Select

Pass

Select

Result type

Fail

CAUTION

Select

xx L STF%

Select

xx R STF%

Select

xx SEC

Abort

Abort Type

Select

Scroll

To Runcount

x-1

RESULTS MORE?

Select Scroll

To Run Verfy

Configuration and Use Manual

39

Calibration

3.4.4

Setting up automatic or remote execution of the Smart Meter Verification test

There are two ways to execute a Smart Meter Verification test automatically:

• Set up a one-time automatic execution

• Set up a recurring execution

To set up a one-time automatic execution, set up a recurring execution, view the number of hours until the next scheduled test, or delete a schedule:

With ProLink II, choose

Tools > Meter Verification > Schedule Meter Verification

.

—

With the display, see Figures 3-6 and 3-11.

With a fieldbus host, Smart Meter Verification scheduling resides in the Diagnostic

transducer block. See Figure 3-12.

Note the following:

• If you are setting up a one-time automatic execution, specify the start time as a number of hours from the present time. For example, if the present time is 2:00 and you specify 3.5 hours, the test will be initiated at 5:30.

• If you are setting up a recurring execution, specify the number of hours to elapse between executions. The first test will be initiated when the specified number of hours has elapsed, and testing will be repeated at the same interval until the schedule is deleted. For example, if the present time is 2:00 and you specify 2 hours, the first test will be initiated at 4:00, the next at

6:00, and so on.

• If you delete the schedule, both the one-time execution and the recurring execution settings are deleted.

40

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

Figure 3-11

Smart Meter Verification scheduler – Display

SCHEDULE VERFY

Select

No Schedule set?

SCHED IS OFF

Scroll

Yes

TURN OFF SCHED/YES?

Scroll

HOURS LEFT

Scroll Select

xx HOURS

Select

Select

Schedule deleted

SET NEXT

Select

xx HOURS

Scroll

SAVE/YES?

No Yes

Select

Scroll

SET RECUR

Select

xx HOURS

Scroll

SAVE/YES?

No Yes

Select

Scroll

Scroll

EXIT

Select

Configuration and Use Manual

41

Calibration

Figure 3-12

Smart Meter Verification scheduler – Fieldbus host

DIAGNOSTIC

Time Until First Run

Time Between Each Run

Time Until Next Run

Time Until First Run

Time Between

Each Run

Time Until Next Run

– Number of hours to wait before starting Smart Meter Verification

– Number of hours to wait between each Smart Meter Verification test, after the first test is completed

– Number of hours until the next Smart Meter Verification test begins

3.5

Performing meter validation

To perform meter validation, measure a sample of the process fluid and compare the measurement with the flowmeter’s reported value.

Use the following formula to calculate a meter factor:

NewMeterFactor = ConfiguredMeterFactor



ActualTransmitterMeasurement

Valid values for meter factors range from

0.8

to

1.2

. If the calculated meter factor exceeds these limits, contact Micro Motion customer service.

Example

The flowmeter is installed and proved for the first time. The flowmeter mass measurement is 250.27 lb; the reference device measurement is

250 lb. A mass flow meter factor is determined as follows:

MassFlowMeterFactor = 1



250.27

= 0.9989

The first mass flow meter factor is 0.9989.

One year later, the flowmeter is proved again. The flowmeter mass measurement is 250.07 lb; the reference device measurement is

250.25 lb. A new mass flow meter factor is determined as follows:

MassFlowMeterFactor = 0.9989



250.25

——————

250.07

= 0.9996

The new mass flow meter factor is 0.9996.

You can adjust meter factors with a fieldbus host (Figure 3-13), ProLink II (Figure 3-14), or the

display (Figure 3-15).

42

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

Figure 3-13

Meter factors – Fieldbus host

MEASUREMENT

Mass Meter Factor

Volume Meter Factor

Density Meter Factor

Mass Meter Factor – Set to the meter factor for mass flow.

Volume Meter Factor – Set to the meter factor for volume flow.

Density Meter Factor – Set to the meter factor for density.

Figure 3-14

Meter factors – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Flow tab

Set values:

• Mass Factor

• Dens Factor

• Vol Factor

Apply

Configuration and Use Manual

43

Calibration

Figure 3-15

Meter factors – Display

Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds

Scroll

OFF-LINE MAINT

Select

Scroll

CONFG

Select

Scroll

Scroll

MTR F

Select

FACTOR MASS

Scroll

FACTOR VOL

Scroll

FACTOR DENS

Scroll

EXIT

3.6

Performing a density calibration

Density calibration includes the following calibration points:

• All sensors:

D1 calibration (low-density)

D2 calibration (high-density)

• T-Series sensors only:

D3 calibration (optional)

D4 calibration (optional)

For T-Series sensors, the optional D3 and D4 calibrations could improve the accuracy of the density measurement. If you choose to perform the D3 and D4 calibrations:

• Do not perform the D1 or D2 calibrations.

• Perform the D3 calibration if you have one calibrated fluid.

• Perform both the D3 and D4 calibrations if you have two calibrated fluids (other than air and water).

The calibrations that you choose must be performed without interruption, in the order listed here.

Note: Before performing the calibration, record your current calibration parameters. If you are using

ProLink II, you can do this by saving the current configuration to a file on the PC. If the calibration fails, restore the known values.

44

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

3.6.1

Preparing for density calibration

Before beginning density calibration, review the requirements in this section.

Sensor requirements

During density calibration, the sensor must be completely filled with the calibration fluid, and flow through the sensor must be at the lowest rate allowed by your application. This is usually accomplished by closing the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor, then filling the sensor with the appropriate fluid.

Density calibration fluids

D1 and D2 density calibration require a D1 (low density) fluid and a D2 (high density) fluid. You may use air and water. If you are calibrating a T-Series sensor, the D1 fluid must be air and the D2 fluid must be water.

CAUTION

For T-Series sensors, the D1 calibration must be performed on air and the

D2 calibration must be performed on water.

For D3 density calibration, the D3 fluid must meet the following requirements:

• Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm

3

• Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm

3

between the density of the D3 fluid and the density of water.

The density of the D3 fluid may be either greater or less than the density of water.

For D4 density calibration, the D4 fluid must meet the following requirements:

• Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm

3

• Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm

3

between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of the D3 fluid. The density of the D4 fluid must be greater than the density of the D3 fluid.

• Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm

3

between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of water.

The density of the D4 fluid may be either greater or less than the density of water

3.6.2

Density calibration procedures

To perform a D1 and D2 density calibration:

•

With a fieldbus host, see Figure 3-16.

•

With ProLink II, see Figure 3-17.

Configuration and Use Manual

45

Calibration

Figure 3-16

D1 and D2 calibration – Fieldbus host

CALIBRATION

Low Density Calibration

High Density Calibration

Low Density Calibration – Method parameter that initiates the D1 procedure below.

High Density Calibration Method parameter that initiates the D2 procedure below.

Close shutoff valve downstream from sensor

D1 calibration

Low Density Calibration

• If calibration fails, see

Section 6.5 for

troubleshooting information.

Next

Fill sensor completely with low-density fluid

Next

Enter the density of the calibration fluid

Next

Calibration in progress

D2 calibration

High Density Calibration

Next

Fill sensor completely with high-density fluid

Next

Enter the density of the calibration fluid

Next

Calibration in progress

Finish

46

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

Figure 3-17

D1 and D2 calibration – ProLink II

Close shutoff valve downstream from sensor

D1 calibration

Fill sensor with D1 fluid

ProLink Menu >

Calibration >

Density cal – Point 1

Enter density of D1 fluid

Do Cal

Calibration in Progress light turns red

Calibration in Progress light turns green

Close

D2 calibration

Fill sensor with D2 fluid

ProLink Menu >

Calibration >

Density cal – Point 2

Enter density of D2 fluid

Do Cal

Calibration in Progress light turns red

Calibration in Progress light turns green

Close

Done

Configuration and Use Manual

47

Calibration

Figure 3-18

D3 (or D3 and D4) calibration (T-Series only) – Fieldbus host

CALIBRATION

D3 Density Calibration

D4 Density Calibration

D3 Density Calibration – Method parameter that initiates the D3 procedure below.

D4 Density Calibration Method parameter that initiates the D4 procedure below.

D4 calibration

D4 Density Calibration

Close shutoff valve downstream from sensor

D3 calibration

D3 Density Calibration

• If calibration fails, see

Section 6.5 for

troubleshooting information.

Next

Fill sensor completely with D3 fluid

Next

Enter the density of the calibration fluid

Next

Calibration in progress

Next

Fill sensor completely with D4 fluid

Next

Enter the density of the calibration fluid

Next

Calibration in progress

Finish Finish

48

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

Figure 3-19

D3 (or D3 and D4) calibration – ProLink II

Close shutoff valve downstream from sensor

D3 calibration

Fill sensor with D3 fluid

ProLink Menu >

Calibration >

Density cal – Point 3

D4 calibration

Fill sensor with D4 fluid

Enter density of D3 fluid

Do Cal

Calibration in Progress light turns red

Calibration in Progress light turns green

Close

ProLink Menu >

Calibration >

Density cal – Point 4

Enter density of D4 fluid

Do Cal

Calibration in Progress light turns red

Calibration in Progress light turns green

Close

Done

Done

• If calibration fails, see

Section 6.5 for troubleshooting

information.

Configuration and Use Manual

49

Calibration

3.7

Performing a temperature calibration

Temperature calibration is a two-point procedure: temperature offset calibration and temperature slope calibration. The entire procedure must be completed without interruption.

You can calibrate for temperature with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

Figure 3-20

Temperature calibration – Fieldbus host

CALIBRATION

Temp Low Calibration

Temp High Calibration

Temp Low Calibration – Method parameter that initiates the low-temperature procedure below.

Temp High Calibration Method parameter that initiates the high-temperature procedure below.

50

Temp Low Calibration

Next

Fill sensor completely with low-temperature fluid

Allow sensor to achieve equilibrium

Enter the temperature of the calibration fluid

Next

Calibration in progress

Temp High Calibration

Next

Fill sensor completely with high-temperature fluid

Allow sensor to achieve equilibrium

Enter the temperature of the calibration fluid

Next

Calibration in progress

• If calibration fails,

see Section 6.5 for

troubleshooting information.

Finish

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Calibration

Figure 3-21

Temperature calibration – ProLink II

Temperature Offset calibration

Fill sensor with lowtemperature fluid

Wait until sensor achieves thermal equilibrium

ProLink Menu >

Calibration >

Temp offset cal

Enter temperature of lowtemperature fluid

Do Cal

Calibration in Progress light turns red

Calibration in Progress light turns green

Close

Temperature Slope calibration

Fill sensor with hightemperature fluid

Wait until sensor achieves thermal equilibrium

ProLink Menu >

Calibration >

Temp slope cal

Enter temperature of hightemperature fluid

Do Cal

Calibration in Progress light turns red

Calibration in Progress light turns green

Close

Done

• If calibration fails, see

Section 6.5 for troubleshooting

information.

Configuration and Use Manual

51

52

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Chapter 4

Configuration

4.1

Overview

This chapter describes how to change the operating settings of the transmitter.

Note: All procedures provided in this chapter assume that you have established communication with

the transmitter and that you are complying with all applicable safety requirements. See Appendices 2

and 3.

4.2

Configuration map

Use this configuration map to guide you through a complete or partial configuration of the transmitter.

Table 4-1

Configuration map

Topic

Gas standard volume

Measurement units

Special measurement units

Petroleum measurement application

Concentration measurement application

Linearization

Output scale

Process alarms

Alarm severity

Damping

Slug flow

Cutoffs

Flow direction

Device settings

Sensor parameters

Display functionality

PlantWeb Alert timeout

Write-protect mode

LD Optimization

Fieldbus host

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Method

ProLink II

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Display

x x x x

4.18

4-54

4.19

4.20

4.14

4.15

4.16

4.17

4.10

4.11

4.12

4.13

4.6

4.7

4.8

4.9

Section

4.3

4.4

4.5

Configuration and Use Manual

53

Configuration

4.3

Configuring standard volume flow measurement for gas

Two types of volume flow measurement are available:

• Liquid volume (the default)

• Gas standard volume

Only one type of volume flow measurement can be performed at a time (i.e., if liquid volume flow measurement is enabled, gas standard volume flow measurement is disabled, and vice versa).

Different sets of volume flow measurement units are available, depending on which type of volume flow measurement is enabled. If you want to use a gas volume flow unit, additional configuration is required.

Note: If you will use the petroleum measurement application or the concentration measurement application, liquid volume flow measurement is required.

Gas standard volume flow can be configured with a fieldbus host or ProLink II. In either case, you must:

• Enable gas standard volume flow

• Specify the standard density (density at reference conditions) of your gas

•

Select the measurement unit to use (see Section 4.4)

•

Set the low flow cutoff value (see Section 4.14)

Note: The display will allow you to select a volume measurement unit from the set available for the configured volume flow type, but it will not allow you to configure gas standard volume flow.

Figure 4-1

GSV – Fieldbus host

MEASUREMENT

Enable Gas Standard Volume

Enable Gas Standard Volume – Set to Enable to set volume flow to use gas standard volume. Set to

Disable to use liquid volume flow.

54

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-2

GSV – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Flow tab

Set Vol Flow Type to

Std Gas Volume

Apply

4.3.1

Configuring gas density

You have two choices for entering the standard density of the gas you are going to measure (i.e., the density of the gas at reference conditions):

• If you know the standard density, you can enter that value into the transmitter. For optimal standard volume measurement accuracy, be sure the standard density you enter is correct and fluid composition is stable. You can enter the gas density with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

• If you do not know the standard density of the gas, and you are using ProLink II, you can use the Gas Wizard. The Gas Wizard can calculate the standard density of the gas that you are measuring.

Figure 4-3

Gas density – Fieldbus host

MEASUREMENT

Gas Density

Gas Density – Set to the standard density of the gas you are going to measure.

Configuration and Use Manual

55

Configuration

Figure 4-4

Gas density – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Flow tab

Set Std Gas Density to the appropriate value

Apply

Figure 4-5

Gas Wizard – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Flow tab

Gas Wizard

Gas listed in

Choose Gas list?

No

Select Enter Other

Gas Property

Yes

Select Choose Gas

Select your gas from the list

Select gas description method:

• Molecular weight

• Specific gravity compared to air

• Density

Provide required information

Next

Enter new values for temperature and pressure

Reference values correct?

No

Change Reference

Conditions

Yes

Next

Finish

56

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

4.4

Changing the measurement units

The transmitter stores measurement units in three different places: the MEASUREMENT transducer block, the AI blocks, and the AO block. If you configure the measurement units in the AI or AO blocks, the MEASUREMENT block will be automatically updated. However, if you configure the units only in the MEASUREMENT block, the AI and AO blocks will not be updated. This results in the following behaviors:

• Because ProLink II and the display store and retrieve the units stored in the MEASUREMENT block, configuring units using ProLink II or the display will not update the AI and AO blocks.

Affected AI and AO blocks will get a configuration error if units are changed in the

MEASUREMENT block but not in the AI or AO block.

• Configuring the units in the MEASUREMENT block with a fieldbus host will produce the same results as if the units had been changed using ProLink II or the display (i.e., the related

AI or AO blocks will get a configuration error unless their units are also changed).

• Configuring the units in an AI or AO block using a fieldbus host will cause the units in

ProLink II and on the display to be updated correctly.

Measurement units can be changed with a fieldbus host, ProLink II, and the display. Refer to Tables

4-2 through 4-7 for complete lists of the units you can set for each process variable.

Note: When the transmitter is configured for liquid volume flow, only liquid volume units are

available (Table 4-3). When the transmitter is configured for gas volume flow, only gas volume units

are available (Table 4-4).

Note: Changing the measurement units for a process variable automatically changes the associated totalizer units as well. For example, setting the mass flow units to g/s will automatically set the mass totalizer unit to grams.

Figure 4-6

Changing measurement units – Fieldbus host

AI

Transducer Scale: Units Index

Transducer Scale: Units Index – Set to the desired measurement units.

AO

Process Value Scale: Units Index

Process Value Scale: Units Index – Set to the desired measurement units.

Configuration and Use Manual

57

Configuration

Figure 4-7

Changing measurement units – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Density tab Flow tab Temperature tab

Select unit from Dens

Units list

Select unit from Vol

Flow Units

(1)

list

Select unit from Mass

Flow Units list

Select unit from

Temp Units list

Apply Apply Apply

(1) If volume flow type is configured to gas standard volume, this list will appear as Std gas vol flow units.

Note: You must also change the units in the appropriate AI block. Failure to do so will cause the AI block to get a configuration error.

58

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-8

Changing measurement units – Display

Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds

Scroll

OFF-LINE MAINT

Select

Scroll

CONFG

Select Select

UNITS

MASS

Scroll

VOL

(1)

Scroll

DENS

Scroll

TEMP

Scroll

PRESS

(1) If volume flow type is configured to gas standard volume, this list will appear as GSV.

Note: You must also change the units in the appropriate AI block. Failure to do so will cause the

AI block to get a configuration error.

Table 4-2

Mass flow measurement units

Fieldbus host

g/s g/min g/h kg/s kg/min kg/h kg/d t/min t/h

Mass flow unit

ProLink II

g/s g/min g/hr kg/s kg/min kg/hr kg/day mTon/min mTon/hr

Display

G/S

G/MIN

G/H

KG/S

KG/MIN

KG/H

KG/D

T/MIN

T/H

Configuration and Use Manual

Unit description

Grams per second

Grams per minute

Grams per hour

Kilograms per second

Kilograms per minute

Kilograms per hour

Kilograms per day

Metric tons per minute

Metric tons per hour

59

Configuration

Table 4-2

Mass flow measurement units (continued)

Fieldbus host

t/d lb/s lb/min lb/h lb/d

STon/min

STon/h

STon/d

LTon/h

LTon/d

Mass flow unit

ProLink II

mTon/day lbs/s lbs/min lbs/hr lbs/day sTon/min sTon/hr sTon/day lTon/hr lTon/day

Display

T/D

LB/S

LB/MIN

LB/H

LB/D

ST/MIN

ST/H

ST/D

LT/H

LT/D

Unit description

Metric tons per day

Pounds per second

Pounds per minute

Pounds per hour

Pounds per day

Short tons (2000 pounds) per minute

Short tons (2000 pounds) per hour

Short tons (2000 pounds) per day

Long tons (2240 pounds) per hour

Long tons (2240 pounds) per day

Fieldbus host

CFS

CFM

CFH ft

3

/d m

3

/s m

3

/min m

3

/h m

3

/d gal/s

GPM gal/h gal/d

Mgal/d

L/s

L/min

L/h

ML/d

ImpGal/s

ImpGal/min

ImpGal/h

ImpGal/d bbl/s bbl/min bbl/h

Table 4-3

Volume flow measurement units – Liquid

Volume flow unit

ProLink II

ft3/sec ft3/min ft3/hr ft3/day m3/sec m3/min m3/hr m3/day

US gal/sec

US gal/min

US gal/hr

US gal/d mil US gal/day l/sec l/min l/hr mil l/day

Imp gal/sec

Imp gal/min

Imp gal/hr

Imp gal/day barrels/sec barrels/min barrels/hr

Display

CUFT/S

CUF/MN

CUFT/H

CUFT/D

M3/S

M3/MIN

M3/H

M3/D

USGPS

USGPM

USGPH

USGPD

MILG/D

L/S

L/MIN

L/H

MILL/D

UKGPS

UKGPM

UKGPH

UKGPD

BBL/S

BBL/MN

BBL/H

Unit description

Cubic feet per second

Cubic feet per minute

Cubic feet per hour

Cubic feet per day

Cubic meters per second

Cubic meters per minute

Cubic meters per hour

Cubic meters per day

U.S. gallons per second

U.S. gallons per minute

U.S. gallons per hour

U.S. gallons per day

Million U.S. gallons per day

Liters per second

Liters per minute

Liters per hour

Million liters per day

Imperial gallons per second

Imperial gallons per minute

Imperial gallons per hour

Imperial gallons per day

Barrels per second

(1)

Barrels per minute

(1)

Barrels per hour

(1)

60

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Table 4-3

Volume flow measurement units – Liquid (continued)

Volume flow unit

Fieldbus host ProLink II

bbl/d barrels/day

Bbl (US Beer)/d Beer barrels/sec

Bbl (US Beer)/min Beer barrels/min

Bbl (US Beer)/h

Bbl (US Beer)/d

Beer barrels/hr

Beer barrels/day

(1) Unit based on oil barrels (42 U.S. gallons).

(2) Unit based on U.S. beer barrels (31 U.S. gallons).

Display

BBL/D

BBBL/S

BBBL/MN

BBBL/H

BBBL/D

Unit description

Barrels per day

(1)

Beer barrels per second

(2)

Beer barrels per minute

(2)

Beer barrels per hour

(2)

Beer barrels per day

(2)

Fieldbus host

Nm

3

/s

Nm

3

/min

Nm

3

/h

Nm

3

/d

NL/s

NL/min

NL/h

NL/d

SCFM

SCFH

Sm

3

/s

Sm

3

/min

Sm

3

/h

Sm

3

/d

SL/s

SL/min

SL/h

SL/d

Table 4-4

Volume flow measurement units – Gas

Volume flow unit

ProLink II

Nm3/sec

Nm3/min

Nm3/hr

Nm3/day

NLPS

NLPM

NLPH

NLPD

SCFM

SCFH

Sm3/S

Sm3/min

Sm3/hr

Sm3/day

SLPS

SLPM

SLPH

SLPD

Display

NM3/S

NM3/MN

NM3/H

NM3/D

NLPS

NLPM

NLPH

NLPD

SCFM

SCFH

SM3/S

SM3/MN

SM3/H

SM3/D

SLPS

SLPM

SLPH

SLPD

Table 4-5

Density measurement units

Fieldbus host

g/cm

3 g/L g/ml kg/L

Density unit

ProLink II

g/cm3 g/l g/ml kg/l

Display

G/CM3

G/L

G/ML

KG/L

Unit description

Normal cubic meters per second

Normal cubic meters per minute

Normal cubic meters per hour

Normal cubic meters per day

Normal liter per second

Normal liter per minute

Normal liter per hour

Normal liter per day

Standard cubic feet per minute

Standard cubic feet per hour

Standard cubic meters per second

Standard cubic meters per minute

Standard cubic meters per hour

Standard cubic meters per day

Standard liter per second

Standard liter per minute

Standard liter per hour

Standard liter per day

Unit description

Grams per cubic centimeter

Grams per liter

Grams per milliliter

Kilograms per liter

Configuration and Use Manual

61

Configuration

Table 4-5

Density measurement units (continued)

Fieldbus host

kg/m

3 lb/gal lb/ft

3 lb/in

3

STon/yd

3 degAPI

SGU

Density unit

ProLink II

kg/m3 lbs/Usgal lbs/ft3 lbs/in3 sT/yd3 degAPI

SGU

Display

KG/M3

LB/GAL

LB/CUF

LB/CUI

ST/CUY

D API

SGU

Unit description

Kilograms per cubic meter

Pounds per U.S. gallon

Pounds per cubic foot

Pounds per cubic inch

Short ton per cubic yard

Degrees API

Specific gravity unit (not temperature corrected)

Table 4-6

Temperature measurement units

Fieldbus host

°

C

°

F

°

R

K

Temperature unit

ProLink II

°

C

°

F

°

R

°

K

Display

°

C

°

F

°

R

°

K

Unit description

Degrees Celsius

Degrees Fahrenheit

Degrees Rankine

Kelvin

Although pressure units are listed in the following table, the transmitter does not measure pressure.

These units are for configuring external pressure compensation. Refer to Section 2.5.

Table 4-7

Pressure measurement units

Pressure unit

ftH20 (

68

°

F

) inH2O (4°C) inH20 ( 68 ° F ) mmH2O (4°C) mmH20 (

68

°

F

) inHg (

0

°

C

) mmHg ( 0 ° C ) psi bar mbar g/cm

2 kg/cm

2

Pa

MPa

Fieldbus host ProLink II

Ft Water

@ 68

°

F

In Water

@ 4

°

C

In Water @ 68 ° F mm Water

@ 4

°

C mm Water

@ 68

°

F

In Mercury

@ 0

°

C mm Mercury @ 0 ° C

PSI bar millibar g/cm2 kg/cm2 pascals megapascals

Display

FTH2O

INW4C

INH2O mmW4C mmH2O

INHG mmHG

PSI

BAR mBAR

G/SCM

KG/SCM

PA

MPA

Unit description

Feet water @ 68 °F

Inches water @ 4 °C

Inches water @ 68 °F

Millimeters water @ 4 °C

Millimeters water @ 68 °F

Inches mercury @ 0 °C

Millimeters mercury @ 0 °C

Pounds per square inch

Bar

Millibar

Grams per square centimeter

Kilograms per square centimeter

Pascals

Megapascals

62

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Table 4-7

Pressure measurement units (continued)

Pressure unit

Fieldbus host ProLink II

kPa torr atm

Kilopascals

Torr @ 0C atms

Display

KPA

TORR

ATM

Unit description

Kilopascals

Torr @ 0 °C

Atmospheres

4.5

Creating special measurement units

If you need to use a non-standard unit of measure, you can create special measurement units. There are two methods available for creating special units:

• Using the special unit features of the MEASUREMENT transducer block. This method is described in this section.

• Using the Transducer Scale, Output Scale, and Linearization parameters of an AI function

block. This method is not described in this section. Refer to Sections 4.8 and 4.9, and the

F

OUNDATION

Fieldbus Blocks manual, available from the Rosemount web site

(www.rosemount.com), for information about creating special units using this method.

The MEASUREMENT transducer block supports one special unit for mass flow, one special measurement unit for liquid volume flow, and one special unit for gas volume flow. Special measurement units consist of:

• Base unit — A combination of:

Base mass or base volume unit — A standard measurement unit that the transmitter already recognizes (e.g., kg, m

3

)

Base time unit — A unit of time that the transmitter already recognizes

(e.g., seconds, days)

• Conversion factor — The number by which the base unit will be divided to convert to the special unit

• Special unit — A non-standard volume-flow or mass-flow unit of measure that you want to be reported by the transmitter.

The terms above are related by the following formulae:



= y Special units



Conversion factor = x Base units y Special units



To create a special unit, you must:

1. Identify the simplest base volume or mass and base time units for your special unit. For example, to create the special volume flow unit pints per minute, the simplest base units are gallons per minute: a.

Base volume unit: gallon b.

Base time unit: minute

Configuration and Use Manual

63

Configuration

2. Calculate the conversion factor:

1 gallon per minute

0.125

8 pints per minute

=

3. Name the new special mass-flow or volume-flow measurement unit and its corresponding totalizer measurement unit: a.

Special volume-flow measurement unit name: pint/min b.

Volume totalizer measurement unit name: pints

Note: Special measurement unit names can be up to 8 characters long, but only the first 5 characters appear on the display.

Special units can be created with a fieldbus host or with ProLink II.

Figure 4-9

Special units for mass flow – Fieldbus host

MEASUREMENT

Mass flow special units base

Mass flow special units time

Mass flow special units conv

Mass flow special units str

Mass Tot/Inv Special Unit Str

Mass flow special units base

Mass flow special units time

Mass flow special units conv

Mass flow special units str

Mass Tot/Inv Special Unit Str

– Set to a mass unit.

– Set to a unit of time.

– Set to the conversion factor. When this parameter equals 1, the transmitter will use normal mass units. When this parameter is not equal to 1, the transmitter will use special mass units.

– Set to the name of the special unit. Unit names can be up to 8 characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).

– Set to the name of the special totalizer unit. Unit names can be up to 8 characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).

64

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-10

Special units for liquid volume flow – Fieldbus host

MEASUREMENT

Vol flow special units base

Vol flow special units time

Vol flow special units conv

Vol flow special units str

Volume Tot/Inv Special Unit Str

Vol flow special units base

Vol flow special units time

Vol flow special units conv

Vol flow special units str

Volume Tot/Inv Special Unit Str

– Set to a liquid volume unit.

– Set to a unit of time.

– Set to the conversion factor. When this parameter equals 1, the transmitter will use normal liquid volume units. When this parameter is not equal to 1, the transmitter will use special liquid volume units.

– Set to the name of the special unit. Unit names can be up to 8 characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).

– Set to the name of the special totalizer unit. Unit names can be up to 8 characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).

Figure 4-11

Special units for gas volume flow – Fieldbus host

MEASUREMENT

Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Base

Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Time

Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Factor

Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Text

Std Gas Vol Total Special Units Text

Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Base – Set to a gas volume unit.

Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Time – Set to a unit of time.

Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Factor – Set to the conversion factor. When this parameter equals 1, the transmitter will use normal gas volume units. When this parameter is not equal to 1, the transmitter will use special gas volume units.

Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Text – Set to the name of the special unit. Unit names can be up to 8 characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).

Std Gas Vol Total Special Units Text – Set to the name of the special totalizer unit. Unit names can be up to 8 characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).

Configuration and Use Manual

65

Configuration

Figure 4-12

Special mass and volume units – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

(1) These labels are slightly different when volume flow is configured for gas standard volume: Base Gas Vol

Unit, Base Gas Vol Time, Gas Vol Flow Conv Fact,

Gas Vol Flow Text, and Gas Vol Total Text.

Special Units tab

Special mass unit

Set the base, time, and conversion factor:

• Base Mass Unit

• Base Mass Time

• Mass Flow Conv Fact

Special volume unit

Set the base, time, and conversion factor:

• Base Vol Unit

(1)

• Base Vol Time

(1)

• Vol Flow Conv Fact

(1)

Set the unit names:

• Mass Flow Text

• Mass Total Text

Set the unit names:

• Vol Flow Text

(1)

• Vol Total Text

(1)

Apply

4.6

Configuring the petroleum measurement application (API feature)

The API parameters determine the values that will be used in API-related calculations. The API parameters are available only if the petroleum measurement application is enabled on your transmitter.

Note: The petroleum measurement application requires liquid volume measurement units. If you plan to use API process variables, ensure that liquid volume flow measurement is specified. See

Section 4.3.

4.6.1

About the petroleum measurement application

Some applications that measure liquid volume flow or liquid density are particularly sensitive to temperature factors, and must comply with American Petroleum Institute (API) standards for measurement. The petroleum measurement application enables Correction of Temperature on volume

of Liquids, or CTL.

66

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Terms and definitions

The following terms and definitions are relevant to the petroleum measurement application:

• API – American Petroleum Institute

• CTL – Correction of Temperature on volume of Liquids. The CTL value is used to calculate the VCF value

• TEC – Thermal Expansion Coefficient

• VCF – Volume Correction Factor. The correction factor to be applied to volume process variables. VCF can be calculated after CTL is derived

CTL derivation methods

There are two derivation methods for CTL:

• Method 1 is based on observed density and observed temperature.

• Method 2 is based on a user-supplied reference density (or thermal expansion coefficient, in some cases) and observed temperature.

Petroleum Measurement reference tables

Reference tables are organized by reference temperature, CTL derivation method, liquid type, and density unit. The table selected here controls all the remaining options.

• Reference temperature:

If you specify a 5x, 6x, 23x, or 24x table, the default reference temperature is 60 °F, and cannot be changed.

If you specify a 53x or 54x table, the default reference temperature is 15 °C. However, you can change the reference temperature, as recommended in some locations (for example, to

14.0 or 14.5 °C).

• CTL derivation method:

If you specify an odd-numbered table (5, 23, or 53), CTL will be derived using method 1 described above.

If you specify an even-numbered table (6, 24, or 54), CTL will be derived using method 2 described above.

• The letters A, B, C, or D that are used to terminate table names define the type of liquid that the table is designed for:

A tables are used with generalized crude and JP4 applications.

B tables are used with generalized products.

C tables are used with liquids with a constant base density or known thermal expansion coefficient.

D tables are used with lubricating oils.

• Different tables use different density units:

Degrees API

Relative density (SG)

Base density (kg/m

3

)

Table 4-8 summarizes these options.

Configuration and Use Manual

67

Configuration

Table 4-8

Petroleum Measurement reference temperature tables

Table

5A

5B

5D

23A

23B

23D

53A

53B

53D

6C

24C

54C

CTL derivation method

Method 1

Method 1

Method 1

Method 1

Method 1

Method 1

Method 1

Method 1

Method 1

Base temperature

60 °F, non-configurable

60 °F, non-configurable

60 °F, non-configurable

60 °F, non-configurable

60 °F, non-configurable

60 °F, non-configurable

15 °C, configurable

15 °C, configurable

15 °C, configurable

Method 2

Method 2

Method 2

60 °F, non-configurable

60 °F, non-configurable

15 °C, configurable

Density unit and range

Degrees API

0 to +100

0 to +85

–10 to +40

Base density Relative density

0.6110 to 1.0760

0.6535 to 1.0760

0.8520 to 1.1640

610 to 1075 kg/m

3

653 to 1075 kg/m

3

825 to 1164 kg/m

3

Reference temperature

60 °F

60 °F

15 °C

Supports

Degrees API

Relative density

Base density in kg/m

3

4.6.2

Configuration procedure

The PM configuration parameters are listed and defined in Table 4-9.

Table 4-9

Petroleum Measurement parameters

Variable

Table type

User defined TEC

(1)

Temperature units

(2)

Density units

Reference temperature

Description

Specifies the table that will be used for reference temperature and reference density unit. Select

the table that matches your requirements. See Petroleum Measurement reference tables.

Thermal expansion coefficient. Enter the value to be used in CTL calculation.

Read-only. Displays the unit used for reference temperature in the reference table.

Read-only. Displays the unit used for reference density in the reference table.

Read-only unless Table Type is set to 53x or 54x. If configurable:

• Specify the reference temperature to be used in CTL calculation.

• Enter reference temperature in °C.

(1) Configurable if Table Type is set to 6C, 24C, or 54C.

(2) In most cases, the temperature unit used by the PM reference table should also be the temperature unit configured for the transmitter

to use in general processing. To configure the temperature unit, see Section 4.4.

68

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Setting the table type

You can set the PM table type with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

Figure 4-13

Petroleum Measurement table type – Fieldbus host

Petroleum

Measurement

PM Table Type

PM Table Type – Set to the desired table type.

Figure 4-14

Petroleum Measurement table type – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

API Setup tab

Select table type from the API Table Type list

Apply

Setting the reference temperature

For the temperature value to be used in CTL calculation, you can use the temperature data from the sensor, or you can configure external temperature compensation to use either a static temperature value or temperature data from an external temperature device.

• To use temperature data from the sensor, no action is required.

•

To configure external temperature compensation, see Section 2.6.

You can set the reference temperature using a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

Configuration and Use Manual

69

Configuration

Figure 4-15

Petroleum Measurement reference temperature – Fieldbus host

Petroleum

Measurem

PM Reference Temp

PM Reference Temp – Set to the desired temperature (in the currently-configured temperature units).

Figure 4-16

Petroleum Measurement reference temperature – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

API Setup tab

Enter the reference temperature in the User

defined reference

temperature list

Apply

Setting the thermal expansion coefficient

If the CTL derivation method for the API table type is method 2, you need to set the thermal expansion coefficient (TEC). You can set a user-defined TEC with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

Figure 4-17

TEC – Fieldbus host

Petroleum

Measurement

User Defined TEC

User Defined TEC – Set to the desired thermal expansion coefficient.

70

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-18

Petroleum Measurement – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

API Setup tab

Enter a coefficient in the

User defined TEC box

Apply

4.7

Configuring the concentration measurement application

Micro Motion sensors provide direct measurements of density, but not of concentration. The concentration measurement application calculates concentration measurement process variables, such as concentration or density at reference temperature, from density process data, appropriately corrected for temperature.

Note: For a detailed description of the concentration measurement application, see the manual

entitled Micro Motion Enhanced Density Application: Theory, Configuration, and Use.

Note: The concentration measurement application requires liquid volume measurement units. If you plan to use concentration measurement process variables, ensure that liquid volume flow

measurement is specified. See Section 4.3.

4.7.1

About the concentration measurement application

The concentration measurement calculation requires a concentration measurement curve, which specifies the relationship between temperature, concentration, and density for the process fluid being measured. Micro Motion supplies a set of six standard concentration measurement curves (see

Table 4-10). If none of these curves is appropriate for your process fluid, you can configure a custom

curve or purchase a custom curve from Micro Motion.

The derived variable, specified during configuration, controls the type of concentration measurement that will be produced. Each derived variable allows the calculation of a subset of concentration

measurement process variables (see Table 4-11). The available concentration measurement process

variables can be used in process control, just as mass flow rate, volume flow rate, and other process variables are used. For example, an event can be defined on a concentration measurement process variable.

• For all standard curves, the derived variable is Mass Conc (Dens).

•

For custom curves, the derived variable may be any of the variables listed in Table 4-11.

The transmitter can hold up to six curves at any given time, but only one curve can be active (used for measurement) at a time. All curves that are in transmitter memory must use the same derived variable.

Configuration and Use Manual

71

Configuration

Table 4-10

Standard curves and associated measurement units

Name

Deg Balling

Deg Brix

Deg Plato

HFCS 42

HFCS 55

HFCS 90

Description

Curve represents percent extract, by mass, in solution, based on °Balling. For example, if a wort is 10 °Balling and the extract in solution is 100% sucrose, the extract is 10% of the total mass.

Curve represents a hydrometer scale for sucrose solutions that indicates the percent by mass of sucrose in solution at a given temperature. For example, 40 kg of sucrose mixed with 60 kg of water results in a 40 °Brix solution.

Curve represents percent extract, by mass, in solution, based on °Plato. For example, if a wort is

10 °Plato and the extract in solution is 100% sucrose, the extract is 10% of the total mass.

Curve represents a hydrometer scale for HFCS 42

(high fructose corn syrup) solutions that indicates the percent by mass of HFCS in solution.

Curve represents a hydrometer scale for HFCS 55

(high fructose corn syrup) solutions that indicates the percent by mass of HFCS in solution.

Curve represents a hydrometer scale for HFCS 90

(high fructose corn syrup) solutions that indicates the percent by mass of HFCS in solution.

Density unit Temperature unit

g/cm

3

°F g/cm

3

°C g/cm

3

°F g/cm

3

°C g/cm

3

°C g/cm

3

°C

Table 4-11

Derived variables and available process variables

Derived variable – ProLink II label and definition

Density @ Ref

Density at reference temperature

Mass/unit volume, corrected to a given reference temperature

SG

Specific gravity

The ratio of the density of a process fluid at a given temperature to the density of water at a given temperature. The two given temperature conditions do not need to be the same.

Mass Conc (Dens)

Mass concentration derived from reference density

The percent mass of solute or of material in suspension in the total solution, derived from reference density

Mass Conc (SG)

Mass concentration derived from specific gravity

The percent mass of solute or of material in suspension in the total solution, derived from specific gravity

Density at reference temperature x

Standard volume flow rate x x x x x x x

Available process variables

Specific gravity

Concentration Net mass flow rate x x x x x x

Net volume flow rate

72

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Table 4-11

Derived variables and available process variables (continued)

Derived variable – ProLink II label and definition

Volume Conc (Dens)

Volume concentration derived from reference density

The percent volume of solute or of material in suspension in the total solution, derived from reference density

Density at reference temperature x x

Volume Conc (SG)

Volume concentration derived from specific gravity

The percent volume of solute or of material in suspension in the total solution, derived from specific gravity

Conc (Dens)

Concentration derived from reference density

The mass, volume, weight, or number of moles of solute or of material in suspension in proportion to the total solution, derived from reference density

Conc (SG)

Concentration derived from specific gravity

The mass, volume, weight, or number of moles of solute or of material in suspension in proportion to the total solution, derived from specific gravity x x

Available process variables

Standard volume flow rate x

Specific gravity

Concentration Net mass flow rate x x x x x x x x x

Net volume flow rate x x

Configuration and Use Manual

73

Configuration

4.7.2

Configuration procedure

Complete configuration instructions for the concentration measurement application are provided in the manual entitled Micro Motion Enhanced Density Application: Theory, Configuration, and Use.

Note: The concentration measurement manual uses ProLink II as the standard configuration tool for the concentration measurement application. Because the fieldbus parameters are very similar to the

ProLink II labels, you can follow the instructions for ProLink II and adapt them to your host. All of the parameters related to the concentration measurement application can be found in the

CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block (see Appendix B).

The typical configuration procedure simply sets up the concentration measurement application to use a standard curve. The following steps are required:

1. Set the transmitter’s density measurement unit to match the unit used by the curve (as listed in

Table 4-10).

2. Set the transmitter’s temperature measurement unit to match the unit used by the curve (as

listed in Table 4-10).

3. Set the derived variable to Mass Conc (Dens).

4. Specify the active curve.

4.8

Changing the linearization

Linearization translates a process variable into different measurement units and onto a new scale.

Output scaling and linearization relate to each other in the following way:

• When the linearization parameter of an AI block is set to Direct, the AI block reports process variables directly from the MEASUREMENT transducer block. The transmitter is shipped with all AI blocks set to Direct linearization by default.

• When the linearization parameter of an AI block is set to Indirect, the value from the

MEASUREMENT transducer block is converted according to the Output Scale parameters

(see Section 4.9).

In addition, the AI block output is converted according to the Transducer Scale parameters, but with a 1/x transformation, i.e., if the upper bound of the Transducer Scale is set to 50%, the output will be doubled.

Indirect linearization can be used along with Output Scale and Transducer Scale to create

special measurement units. Refer Section 4.9 and to the F

OUNDATION

Fieldbus Blocks manual, available from the Rosemount web site (www.rosemount.com), for information about creating special units using this method.

• When the linearization parameter of an AI block is set to Indirect square root, the AI block reports the square root of the scaled output. In general, indirect square root linearization is not useful for Coriolis meters.

You can change the linearization setting only with a fieldbus host.

74

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-19

Linearization – Fieldbus host

AI

Linearization Type

Linearization Type – Set to the desired linearization value.

4.9

Changing the output scale

The AI function blocks can be configured to scale their output. The output scale is established by defining a process variable value at 0% of scale and at 100% of scale. The output of the AI block will be translated to a value between these two limits.

Note: Although it is possible to set the Output Scale: Units Index parameter to a value different from the Transducer Scale: Units Index parameter, this has no effect on output. The Output Scale: Units

Index parameter is primarily useful as a label.

The output scale is a function of the AI blocks, and is only used when linearization is set to Indirect

(see Section 4.8). If you choose to use output scaling, note that it has no effect on the process values

found in the MEASUREMENT transducer block. This results in the following behaviors:

• ProLink II and the display use the process values in the MEASUREMENT transducer block.

Therefore, the output of a scaled AI block may differ from the value reported by other communication tools.

• Slug flow and flow cutoffs are configured in the MEASUREMENT block. Therefore, output scaling has no effect on the behavior of the transmitter with regard to slug flow or flow cutoffs.

Example

To create a special unit for pints per second, the AI block assigned to channel 4 (volume) can be configured as follows:

• Transducer Scale: Units Index = gal/s

• Transducer Scale: EU at 0% = 0

• Transducer Scale: EU at 100% = 100

• Output Scale: Units Index = pints

• Output Scale: EU at 0% = 0

• Output Scale: EU at 100% = 800

• Linearization Type = Indirect

AI:Out

16 pints/s

Volume Flow:Value

2 gal/s

Display

2 gal/s

Configuration and Use Manual

75

Configuration

You can change the output scale only with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-20).

Figure 4-20

Output scaling – Fieldbus host

AI

Output Scale: EU at 0%

Output Scale: EU at 100%

Output Scale: EU at 0% – Set to process variable value at 0% of scale, in the configured units.

Output Scale: EU at 100% – Set to process variable value at 100% of scale, in the configured units.

4.10

Changing process alarms

The transmitter sends process alarms to indicate that a process value has exceeded its user-defined limits. The transmitter maintains four alarm values for each process variable. Each alarm value has a priority associated with it. In addition, the transmitter has an alarm hysteresis function to prevent erratic alarm reports.

Note: Process alarms are only posted through the AI function block and are NOT shown on the display or in ProLink II.

4.10.1

Alarm values

The process alarm values are the limits for process variables. Whenever a process variable exceeds a process alarm value, the transmitter broadcasts an alarm to the fieldbus network.

Each AI function block has four process alarm values: high alarm, high-high alarm, low alarm, and low-low alarm.

Figure 4-21

Alarm values

High-high alarm

High alarm

Normal process range

Low alarm

Low-low alarm

You can change the alarm values only with a fieldbus host.

76

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-22

Alarm values – Fieldbus host

AI

High High Limit

High Limit

Low Limit

Low Low Limit

High High Limit – Set to the value for the high-high alarm.

High Limit

Low Limit

– Set to the value for the high alarm.

– Set to the value for the low alarm.

Low Low Limit – Set to the value for the low-low alarm.

4.10.2

Alarm priorities

Each process alarm is assigned an alarm priority. A process alarm priority is a number from 0 to 15.

Higher numbers indicate higher alarm priorities. These values are for fieldbus network management and do not affect transmitter operation.

You can change the process alarm priority values only with a fieldbus host.

Figure 4-23

Alarm priorities – Fieldbus host

AI

High High Priority

High Priority

Low Priority

Low Low Priority

High High Priority – Set to the priority for the high-high alarm.

High Priority – Set to the priority for the high alarm.

Low Priority – Set to the priority for the low alarm.

Low Low Priority – Set to the priority for the low-low alarm.

4.10.3

Alarm hysteresis

The alarm hysteresis value is a percentage of the output scale. After a process alarm is created, the transmitter will not create new alarms unless the process first returns to a value within the range of the

alarm hysteresis percentage. Figure 4-24 shows the transmitter’s alarm behavior with an alarm

hysteresis value of 50%.

Configuration and Use Manual

77

Configuration

Note the following about hysteresis:

• A low hysteresis value allows the transmitter to broadcast a new alarm every time or nearly every time the process variable crosses over the alarm limit.

• A high hysteresis value prevents the transmitter from broadcasting new alarms unless the process variable first returns to a value sufficiently below the high alarm limit or above the low alarm limit.

Figure 4-24

High versus low alarm hysteresis values

New alarms

not created

New alarm created here

HIGH ALARM

Alarm created

Hysteresis value

LOW ALARM

You can change the alarm hysteresis value only with a fieldbus host.

Figure 4-25

Alarm hysteresis – Fieldbus host

AI

Alarm Hysteresis

Alarm Hysteresis – Set to the desired percentage of output scale, where scale is defined by either the

Transducer Scale or Output Scale values.

78

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Alarm code

A017

A018

A019

A020

A021

A025

A026

A028

A031

A032

A033

A034

A102

A008

A009

A010

A011

A012

A013

A014

A016

A001

A002

A003

A004

A005

A006

4.11

Configuring status alarm severity

Status alarm severity does not affect the fieldbus alarm system (see Figure 4.10). The main function of

status alarm severity in the Model 2700 with F

OUNDATION

fieldbus transmitter is to control the

behavior of the display. See Section 5.4 for information about how the display indicates the severity of

alarms.

The severity level of some alarms can be reclassified. For example:

• The default severity level for Alarm A020 (calibration factors unentered) is

Fault

, but you can reconfigure it to either

Informational

or

Ignore

.

• The default severity level for Alarm A102 (drive over-range) is

Informational

, but you can reconfigure it to either

Ignore

or

Fault

.

A list of all status alarms and default severity levels is shown in the following table. (For more information on status alarms, including possible causes and troubleshooting suggestions, see

Section 6.9.)

Table 4-12

Status alarms and severity levels

Description

(E)EPROM Checksum Error (CP)

RAM Error (CP)

Sensor Failure

Temperature Sensor Failure

Input Overrange

Not Configured

Density Overrange

Transmitter Initializing/warming Up

Calibration Failure

Cal Fail — Too Low

Cal Fail — Too High

Cal Fail — Too Noisy

Transmitter Failed

Line RTD Temperature Out-of-Range

Meter RTD Temperature Out-of-Range

(E)EPROM Checksum Error

RAM or ROM Test Error

Calibration Factors Unentered

Incorrect Sensor Type (K1)

Protected Boot Sector Fault (CP)

Sensor/Transmitter Communication Error

Core Processor Write Failure

Low Power

Smart Meter Verification In Progress and Outputs Fixed

Sensor OK/Tubes Stopped by Process

Smart Meter Verification Failed

Drive Overrange/Partially Full Tube

Default severity

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

(1)

Fault

Informational

Informational

Fault

Ignore

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Fault

Configurable

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Configuration and Use Manual

79

Configuration

Table 4-12

Status alarms and severity levels (continued)

Alarm code

A103

A104

A105

A106

A107

A116

A117

A120

A121

A128

A129

A131

A132

Description

Default severity

Data Loss Possible (Tot and Inv) Informational

Calibration-in-Progress Informational

(2)

Slug Flow

AI/AO Simulation Active

Informational

Informational

Power Reset Occurred

API: Temperature Outside Standard Range

API: Density Outside Standard Range

CM: Unable to Fit Curve Data

CM: Extrapolation Alarm

Factory configuration data invalid

Factory configuration data checksum invalid

Smart Meter Verification In Progress

Simulation Mode Active

Informational

Informational

Informational

Informational

Informational

Informational

Fault

Informational

Informational

Configurable

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

(1) The severity changes automatically based on the configured output state of a Smart Meter Verification test. If the output state is set to Last Measured Value (LMV), the alarm severity will be Informational. If the output state is set to Fault, the alarm severity will be

Fault.

(2) Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to Fault.

Alarm severity can be configured with a fieldbus host or ProLink II. Some configurable alarms can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but not to Fault.

Figure 4-26

Alarm severity – Fieldbus host

DIAGNOSTICS

Alarm Index

Alarm Severity

Alarm Index – Select an alarm for which you want to modify the severity. (You must write to the transmitter before the Alarm Severity parameter becomes available.)

Alarm Severity – Select a severity for the alarm indicated by the Alarm Index parameter.

80

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-27

Alarm severity – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Select an alarm from the Alarm list

Alarm tab

Select a severity from the Severity list

Apply

4.12

Changing the damping values

A damping value is a period of time, in seconds, over which the process variable value will change to reflect 63% of the change in the actual process. Damping helps the transmitter smooth out small, rapid measurement fluctuations.

• A high damping value makes the output appear to be smoother because the output must change slowly.

• A low damping value makes the output appear to be more erratic because the output changes more quickly.

Damping can be configured for flow, density, and temperature using a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

Note: There is also a damping parameter in each AI block called Process Value Filter Time. In order to avoid having two (potentially conflicting) damping values, you should set damping values only in the MEASUREMENT transducer block. The Process Value Filter Time parameter for each AI block should be set to 0.

When you specify a new damping value, it is automatically rounded down to the nearest valid

damping value. Valid damping values are listed in Table 4-13.

Note: For gas applications, Micro Motion recommends a minimum flow damping value of 2.56.

Before setting the damping values, review Section 4.12.1 for information on how the damping values

affect other transmitter measurements.

Table 4-13

Valid damping values

Process variable

Flow (mass and volume)

Density

Temperature

Valid damping values

0, 0.04, 0.08, 0.16, … 40.96

0, 0.04, 0.08, 0.16, … 40.96

0, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, … 76.8

Configuration and Use Manual

81

Configuration

Figure 4-28

Damping – Fieldbus host

MEASUREMENT

Flow Damping

Density Damping

Temperature Damping

Flow Damping

Density Damping

– Set to the desired damping value for mass flow and volume flow measurement.

– Set to the desired damping value for density measurement.

Temperature Damping – Set to the desired damping value for temperature measurement.

Figure 4-29

Damping – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Flow tab Density tab Temperature tab

Enter a damping value in the Flow Damp box

Enter a damping value in the Dens Damping box

Enter a damping value in the Temp Damping box

Apply Apply Apply

4.12.1

Damping and volume measurement

When configuring damping values, note the following:

• Liquid volume flow is derived from mass and density measurements; therefore, any damping applied to mass flow and density will affect liquid volume measurement.

• Gas standard volume flow is derived from mass flow measurement, but not from density measurement. Therefore, only damping applied to mass flow will affect gas standard volume measurement.

Be sure to set damping values accordingly.

82

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

4.13

Changing slug flow limits and duration

Slugs—gas in a liquid process or liquid in a gas process—occasionally appear in some applications.

The presence of slugs can significantly affect the process density reading. The slug flow parameters can help the transmitter suppress extreme changes in process variables, and can also be used to identify process conditions that require correction.

Slug flow parameters are as follows:

• Low slug flow limit — the point below which a condition of slug flow will exist. Typically, this is the lowest density you expect to observe for your process. The default value is 0.0 g/cm

3

.

The valid range is 0.0–10.0 g/cm

3

.

• High slug flow limit — the point above which a condition of slug flow will exist. Typically, this is the highest density you expect to observe for your process. The default value is

5.0 g/cm

3

. The valid range is 0.0–10.0 g/cm

3

.

• Slug flow duration — the number of seconds the transmitter waits for a slug flow condition to clear. If the transmitter detects slug flow, it will post a slug flow alarm and hold its last

“pre-slug” flow rate until the end of the slug flow duration. If slugs are still present after the slug flow duration has expired, the transmitter will report a flow rate of zero. The default value for slug flow duration is 0.0 seconds. The valid range is 0.0–60.0 seconds.

Note: Raising the low slug flow limit or lowering the high slug flow limit will increase the possibility that slug flow conditions will be detected by the transmitter.

Note: The slug flow limits must be entered in g/cm

3

, even if another unit has been configured for density. Slug flow duration must be entered in seconds.

Slug flow can be configured using a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

Figure 4-30

Slug flow settings – Fieldbus host

DIAGNOSTICS

Slug Low Limit

Slug High Limit

Slug Duration

Slug Low Limit – Set to the density below which a condition of slug flow will exist.

Slug High Limit – Set to the density above which a condition of slug flow will exist.

Slug Duration – Set to the number of seconds to wait for a slug flow condition to clear before a slug flow alarm is posted.

Configuration and Use Manual

83

Configuration

Figure 4-31

Slug flow settings – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Density tab

Set the density limits:

• Slug Low Limit

• Slug High Limit

Set the slug flow duration in the Slug

Duration box

Apply

4.14

Configuring cutoffs

Cutoffs are user-defined values below which the transmitter reports a value of zero for the specified process variable. Cutoffs can be set for mass flow, volume flow, gas standard volume flow, and density.

The following table lists the default values and relevant comments for each cutoff. See Section 4.14.1

for information on how the cutoffs interact with other transmitter measurements.

Table 4-14

Cutoff default values and comments

Cutoff

Mass

Liquid volume

Default value Comments

0.0 g/s

0.0 L/s

0.0 SCFM

Micro Motion recommends a mass flow cutoff value of 0.2% of the sensor’s maximum flow rate for standard operation, and 2.5% of the sensor’s maximum flow rate for empty-full-empty batching.

The lower limit for volume flow cutoff is 0. The upper limit for volume flow cutoff is the sensor’s flow calibration factor, in L/s, multiplied by 0.2.

No limit Gas standard volume flow

Density 0.2 g/cm

3

The range for density cutoff is 0.0–0.5 g/cm

3

Cutoffs can be configured with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

84

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-32

Cutoffs – Fieldbus host

MEASUREMENT

Mass Flow Cutoff

Vol Flow Cutoff

Std Gas Vol Flow Cutoff

Density Cutoff

Mass Flow Cutoff

Vol Flow Cutoff

– Set to the desired mass flow cutoff value.

– Set to the desired (liquid) volume flow cutoff value.

Std Gas Vol Flow Cutoff – Set to the desired (gas) volume flow cutoff value.

Density Cutoff – Set to the desired density cutoff value.

Figure 4-33

Cutoffs – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Flow tab Density tab

Enter values in the Mass

Flow Cutoff or Volume

Flow Cutoff

(1)

boxes

Enter a value in the

Density Cutoff box

Apply Apply

(1) When volume flow is configured for gas standard volume, this box is labeled

Std gas vol flow cutoff.

4.14.1

Cutoffs and volume flow

If liquid volume flow is enabled:

• The density cutoff is applied to the volume flow calculation. Accordingly, if the density drops below its configured cutoff value, the volume flow rate will go to zero.

• The mass flow cutoff is not applied to the volume flow calculation. Even if the mass flow drops below the cutoff, and therefore the mass flow indicators go to zero, the volume flow rate will be calculated from the actual mass flow process variable.

If gas standard volume flow is enabled, neither the mass flow cutoff nor the density cutoff is applied to the volume flow calculation.

Configuration and Use Manual

85

Configuration

4.15

Changing the flow direction parameter

The flow direction parameter controls how the transmitter reports flow rate and how flow is added to or subtracted from the totalizers.

• Forward (positive) flow moves in the direction of the arrow on the sensor.

• Reverse (negative) flow moves in the direction opposite of the arrow on the sensor.

Options for flow direction include:

• Forward Flow

• Reverse Flow

• Bi-directional

• Absolute Value

• Negate/Forward Only

• Negate/Bi-directional

The effect of each of these options is shown in the following table.

Table 4-15

Transmitter behavior for each flow direction value

Forward flow Reverse flow

Flow direction value

Forward only

Reverse only

Bi-directional

Absolute value

Negate/forward only

Negate/bi-directional

Flow totals

Increase

No change

Increase

Increase

No change

Decrease

Flow values on display or via digital comm.

Read positive

Read positive

Read positive

Read positive

(1)

Read negative

Read negative

Flow totals

No change

Increase

Decrease

Increase

Increase

Increase

Flow values on display or via digital comm.

Read negative

Read negative

Read negative

Read positive

(1)

Read positive

Read positive

(1) Refer to the digital communications status bits for an indication of whether flow is positive or negative.

You can change the flow direction parameter with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

Figure 4-34

Flow direction parameter – Fieldbus host

MEASUREMENT

Flow Direction

Flow Direction

– Set to the desired value (refer to Flow direction value in Table 4-15).

86

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-35

Flow direction parameter – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Flow tab

Select a value from the Flow Direction list

Apply

See Table 4-15 for flow

direction values.

4.16

Changing device settings

The device settings are used to describe the flowmeter components. The following information can be entered:

• Tag

• Message

• Date

These parameters are for user convenience and network management. They are not used in transmitter processing, and are not required.

You can set the tag with a fieldbus host by using the host’s tagging features. You can set the tag,

message, and date with ProLink II (Figure 4-36).

CAUTION

Setting the software tag via ProLink II will cause the transmitter to restart.

Configuration and Use Manual

87

Configuration

Figure 4-36

Device settings – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Device (Fieldbus) tab

Enter information in the boxes provided

Apply

If you are entering a date, use the left and right arrows at the top of the calendar shown in ProLink II to select the year and month, then click on a date.

4.17

Configuring sensor parameters

The sensor parameters are used to describe the sensor component of your flowmeter. These sensor parameters are not used in transmitter processing, and are not required:

• Serial number

• Sensor material

• Liner material

• Flange

You can configure the sensor parameters with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

Figure 4-37

Sensor parameters – Fieldbus host

DEVICE

INFORMATION

Sensor Serial Number

Sensor Material

Liner Material

Flange

Sensor Serial Number – Enter the sensor serial number.

Sensor Material Select the sensor material.

Liner Material Select the liner material.

Flange Select the flange.

88

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-38

Sensor parameters – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Select the liner material from the

Liner Matl list

Sensor tab

Enter the sensor serial number in the

Sensor s/n box

Select the sensor serial material from the Sensor Matl list

Select the flange from the Flange list

Apply

4.18

Changing the display functionality

You can restrict the display functionality or change the variables that are shown on the display.

4.18.1

Enabling and disabling display functions

Table 4-16

Display functions and parameters

Display function

Totalizer reset

(1)

Fieldbus parameter Display code Enabled Disabled

Totalizer start/stop

Auto scroll

(2)

Offline menu

Alarm menu

Totalizer reset

Totalizer start/stop

Auto scroll

Offline menu

Alarm menu

TOTAL RESET

TOTAL STOP

AUTO SCRLL

Resetting mass and volume totalizers is permitted.

Resetting mass and volume totalizers is not possible.

Operator can start and stop totalizers from the display.

Display automatically scrolls through each process variable.

DISPLAY OFFLN Operator has access to the offline menu.

DISPLAY ALARM Operator has access to alarm menu.

Operator cannot start or stop totalizers.

Operator must Scroll to view process variables.

No access to the offline menu.

No access to the alarm menu.

ACK all alarms

Offline password

(3)

ACK all alarms

Offline password

DISPLAY ACK

CODE OFFLN

Operator can acknowledge all current alarms at once.

Password required for offline menu. See

Section 4.18.4

Alarms must be acknowledged individually.

Offline menu accessible without a password.

Configuration and Use Manual

89

Configuration

Table 4-16

Display functions and parameters (continued)

Display function

Display backlight

Status LED blinking

Fieldbus parameter

Display backlight

Status LED blinking

Display code

DISPLAY BKLT

Not accessible via the display

Enabled

Display backlight is ON.

Status LED will blink when there are unacknowledged alarms active.

Password required for alarms menu.

Disabled

Display backlight is OFF.

Status LED will not blink.

Alarm password

(3)

Alarm password CODE ALARM Alarm menu accessible without a password.

(1) If the petroleum measurement application is installed on your transmitter, the display password is always required to start, stop, or reset a totalizer, even if neither password is enabled. If the petroleum measurement application is not installed, the display password is never required for these functions, even if one of the display passwords is enabled.

(2) If enabled, you may want to configure Scroll Rate. See Section 4.18.2.

(3) If enabled, the display password must also be configured. See Section 4.18.4.

Note the following:

• If you use the display to disable access to the off-line menu, the off-line menu will disappear as soon as you exit the menu system. If you want to re-enable access, you must use a different method (e.g., ProLink II).

• If you are using the display to configure the display:

You must enable Auto Scroll before you can configure Scroll Rate.

You must enable the off-line password before you can configure the password.

You can enable and disable the display parameters with a fieldbus host, ProLink II, or the display.

Figure 4-39

Display functions – Fieldbus host

LOCAL DISPLAY

*

*

– Refer to the fieldbus parameters in Table 4-16. Each parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled.

90

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-40

Display functions – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Display tab

Enable or disable functions using the checkboxes

Apply

Configuration and Use Manual

91

Configuration

Figure 4-41

Display functions – Display

Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds

Scroll

OFF-LINE MAINT

Select

Scroll

CONFG

TOTALS RESET

Scroll

TOTALS STOP

Scroll

DISPLAY OFFLN

(1)

Select

UNITS

Scroll

DISPLAY ALARM

Scroll

DISPLAY

Select Scroll

DISPLAY ACK

Scroll

AUTO SCRLL

(2)

Scroll

CODE OFFLN

(3)

Scroll

CODE ALARM

(3)

Scroll

DISPLAY BKLT

Scroll

EXIT

(1) If you disable access to the offline menu, the offline menu will disappear as soon as you exit. To re-enable access, you must use a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

(2) If Auto Scroll is enabled, a Scroll Rate screen is displayed immediately after the Auto Scroll screen.

(3) If either password is enabled, a Change Code screen will be displayed so that the password can be configured.

4.18.2

Changing the scroll rate

The scroll rate is used to control the speed of scrolling when auto scroll is enabled. Scroll rate defines how long each display variable will be shown on the display. The time period is defined in seconds

(e.g., if scroll rate is set to 10, each display variable will be shown on the display for 10 seconds). The valid range is from 0 to 10 seconds.

You can change the scroll rate with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

92

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-42

Scroll rate – Fieldbus host

LOCAL DISPLAY

Display Scroll Rate

Display Scroll Rate – Set to the number of seconds each variable should be displayed.

Figure 4-43

Scroll rate – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Display tab

Enter number of seconds in Auto

Scroll Rate box

Apply

4.18.3

Changing the update period

The update period (or display rate) parameter controls how often the display is refreshed with current data. The default is 200 milliseconds. The range is 100 to 10000 milliseconds. The update period value applies to all displayed process variables.

You can change the update period with a fieldbus host, ProLink II, or the display.

Figure 4-44

Update period – Fieldbus host

LOCAL DISPLAY

Update rate

Update Rate – Set to the number of milliseconds between updates to the display (100 to 10000, default is 200).

Configuration and Use Manual

93

Configuration

Figure 4-45

Update period – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Display tab

Enter a value between 100 and

10000 milliseconds in the Update Period box

Apply

Figure 4-46

Update period – Display

Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds

Scroll

OFF-LINE MAINT

Select

Scroll

CONFG

Select

UNITS

Scroll

Select

DISPLAY

TOTALS RESET

Scroll

DISPLAY RATE

Select

Enter a value between

100 and 10000 milliseconds

4.18.4

Changing the display password

The display password is a numeric code that can contain up to four digits. It is used for both the

off-line menu password and the alarm menu password. See Section 4.4.4 for information on how the

two passwords are implemented.

94

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

If you are using the display, you must enable either the off-line password or the alarm screen

password before you can configure the password (see Section 4.18.1).

Note: If the petroleum measurement application is installed on your transmitter, the display password is always required to start, stop, or reset a totalizer, even if neither password is enabled. If the petroleum measurement application is not installed, the display password is never required for these functions, even if one of the passwords is enabled.

You can change the password with a fieldbus host, Prolink II, or the display.

Figure 4-47

Display password – Fieldbus host

LOCAL DISPLAY

Display Offline Password

Display Offline Password – Enter a 4-digit password between 0000 and 9999.

Figure 4-48

Display password – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Display tab

Enter a 4-digit password in the

Offline Password

box

Apply

Configuration and Use Manual

95

Configuration

Figure 4-49

Display password – Display

Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds

Scroll

OFF-LINE MAINT

Select

Scroll

CONFG

Select

UNITS

Scroll

DISPLAY

Select

Scroll

CODE OFFLN

(1)

Scroll

CHANGE CODE

Select

(1) Select CODE OFFLN to enable the display password. This will enable the CHANGE

CODE option, which is used to set the display password.

Enter a new password.

96

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

4.18.5

Changing the display variables and precision

The display can scroll through up to 15 process variables in any order. You can select the process variables you wish to see and the order in which they should appear.

Additionally, you can configure display precision for each display variable. Display precision controls the number of digits to the right of the decimal place. The range of the display precision is 0 to 5.

Note: If you change the volume flow type from Liquid Volume to Gas Standard Volume (see

Section 4.3), any display variables configured for volume flow will change automatically to GSV flow.

Likewise, if you change the volume flow type from Gas Standard Volume to Liquid Volume, any display variables configured for GSV flow will change automatically to volume flow.

Table 4-17 shows an example of a display variable configuration. Notice that you can repeat variables,

and you can choose a value of “None.” The actual appearance of each process variable on the display

is described in Appendix 4.

Table 4-17

Example of a display variable configuration

Display variable

Display variable 1

Display variable 2

Display variable 3

Display variable 4

Display variable 5

Display variable 6

Display variable 7

Display variable 8

Display variable 9

Display variable 10

Display variable 11

Display variable 12

Display variable 13

Display variable 14

Display variable 15

Process variable

Mass flow

Volume flow

Density

Mass flow

Volume flow

Mass totalizer

Mass flow

Temperature

Volume flow

Volume totalizer

Density

Temperature

None

None

None

You can change the display variables and precision with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

Configuration and Use Manual

97

Configuration

Figure 4-50

Display variables – Fieldbus host

LOCAL DISPLAY

Display Variable 1 through Display Variable 15

Number of Decimals

Display Variable 1…15

– Set each parameter to an available process variable.

Number of Decimals – Set to the number of decimal places to be shown on the display.

Figure 4-51

Display variables – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Display tab

Select a process variable from each drop-down list

Enter a value in the

Number of Decimals

box

Apply

4.18.6

Changing the display language

The display can be configured to use any of the following languages for data and menus:

• English

• French

• German

• Spanish

The display language can be configured using a fieldbus host, ProLink II, or the display.

98

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-52

Display language – Fieldbus host

LOCAL DISPLAY

Language

Language – Set to the desired display language.

Figure 4-53

Display language – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Display tab

Select a language from the Display

Language list

Apply

Configuration and Use Manual

99

Configuration

Figure 4-54

Display language – Display

Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds

Scroll

OFF-LINE MAINT

Select

Scroll

CONFG

Select

UNITS

Scroll

DISPLAY

Select

TOTALS RESET

Scroll

DISPLAY LANG

Select

ENG

Scroll

FREN

Scroll

GER

Scroll

SPAN

4.19

Configuring write-protect mode

When the transmitter is in write-protect mode, the configuration data stored in the transmitter and core processor cannot be changed until write-protect mode is disabled.

You can configure write-protect mode with a fieldbus host, ProLink II, or the display.

Figure 4-55

Write-protect mode – Fieldbus host

100

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-56

Write-protect mode – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Device (Fieldbus) tab

Select the Enable

Write Protection

checkbox

Apply

Figure 4-57

Write-protect mode – Display

Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds

Scroll

OFF-LINE MAINT

Select

Scroll

CONFIG LOCK

Select

ENABL/DISABL

Configuration and Use Manual

101

Configuration

4.20

Enabling LD Optimization

LD Optimization is a special compensation is that is specifically for hydrocarbon liquids. LD

Optimization should not be used with any other process fluids. LD Optimization is available only with certain large sensor sizes. If your sensor can benefit from LD Optimization, the enable/disable option will appear in ProLink II or on the display.

CAUTION

If you send the transmitter to a calibration facility to perform a water calibration, either during startup or any time thereafter, LD Optimization must be disabled. When you have completed the calibration, re-enable LD

Optimization.

To enable LD Optimization, see Figures 4-58 and 4-59.

Figure 4-58

LD Optimization – ProLink II

102

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Configuration

Figure 4-59

LD Optimization – Display

Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds

Scroll

OFF-LINE MAINT

Select

Scroll

CONFG

Select

Scroll

Scroll

MTR F

Select

FACTOR LD

Select

LD OPT

Configuration and Use Manual

103

Configuration

104

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Chapter 5

Operation

5.1

Overview

This section describes how to use the transmitter in everyday operation. The procedures in this section will enable you to use a fieldbus host, the display, or ProLink II to:

•

View process variables (Section 5.2)

•

Use simulation mode (Section 5.3)

•

Respond to alarms (Section 5.4)

•

Use the totalizers and inventories (Section 5.5)

Note: All procedures provided in this chapter assume that you have established communication with

the transmitter and that you are complying with all applicable safety requirements. See Appendices 2

and 3.

5.2

Viewing process variables

Process variables include measurements such as mass flow rate, volume flow rate, mass total, volume total, temperature, density, and drive gain.

You can view process variables with a fieldbus host, the display, or ProLink II.

With a fieldbus host

The transmitter has four fieldbus AI function blocks. Each AI function block reports the value of one process variable, the associated units of measure, and a status value that indicates measurement quality. For more information on the function blocks, refer to the F

OUNDATION

Fieldbus Blocks manual, available at the Rosemount web site (www.rosemount.com).

To view a process variable, select the AI function block that measures that variable, and read the Out

parameter. The output of AI blocks may be influenced by output scaling (see Section 4.9).

You can also view each process variable by reading the MEASUREMENT transducer block parameter for each process variable. The following table lists the process variables that correspond to each MEASUREMENT transducer block parameter.

Configuration and Use Manual

105

Operation

Table 5-1

Process variable parameters in the MEASUREMENT transducer block

Process variable

Mass-flow rate

Volume-flow rate

Temperature

Density

Gas standard volume

(1)

Transducer block parameter

Mass Flow: Value

Volume Flow: Value

Temperature: Value

Density: Value

Gas Volume Flow Rate: Value

(1) Gas standard volume is not available if either the petroleum measurement application or the concentration measurement application is enabled.

With the display

Refer to Appendix 4 for a detailed explanation of how to use the display to view process variables.

The process variables shown by the display may need to be configured. Refer to Section 4.18.5.

With ProLink II software

To view process variables with ProLink II, choose

ProLink > Process Variables

.

5.2.1

Viewing API process variables

You can view petroleum measurement (API) process variables with a fieldbus host, the display, or

ProLink II.

With a fieldbus host

If an AI function block has been configured to use one of the petroleum measurement (API) variable

channels (see Section 2.3), you can select that AI block and read its Out parameter.

You can also view all of the petroleum measurement (API) variables by examining their parameters in the petroleum measurement (API) transducer block.

Table 5-2

Petroleum Measurement process variables by API transducer block parameter

API process variable

Temperature corrected density

Temperature corrected (standard) volume flow

Batch weighted average density

Batch weighted average temperature

API transducer block parameter

API Corr Density: Value

API Corr Volume Flow: Value

API Ave Density: Value

API Ave Temperature: Value

106

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Operation

With the display

Refer to Appendix 4 for a detailed explanation of how to use the display to view process variables.

The process variables shown by the display may need to be configured. Refer to Section 4.18.5.

With ProLink II software

To view API process variables with ProLink II software, choose

ProLink > API Process Variables

.

5.2.2

Viewing concentration measurement process variables

You can view concentration measurement (CM) process variables with a fieldbus host, the display, or

ProLink II.

With a fieldbus host

If an AI function block has been configured to use one of the CM variable channels (see Section 2.3),

you can select that AI block and read its Out parameter.

You can also view all of the CM variables by examining their parameters in the CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT transducer block.

Table 5-3

CM process variables by CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameter

CM process variable

Density at reference

Density (fixed specific gravity units)

Standard volume flow rate

Net mass flow rate

Concentration

CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameter

CM Density At Ref: Value

CM Density SG: Value

CM Std Volume Flow: Value

CM Net Mass Flow: Value

CM Concentration: Value

With the display

Refer to Appendix 4 for a detailed explanation of how to use the display to view process variables.

The process variables shown by the display may need to be configured. Refer to Section 4.18.5.

With ProLink II software

To view CM process variables with ProLink II, choose

ProLink > CM Process Variables

.

5.3

Simulation mode

The transmitter has two simulation modes:

• Fieldbus simulation mode

• Sensor simulation mode

5.3.1

Fieldbus simulation mode

The transmitter has a “simulate enable” switch that causes the transmitter to function in simulation mode as defined in the F

OUNDATION

fieldbus function block specification. This switch is software-selectable via a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

Configuration and Use Manual

107

Operation

Figure 5-1

Fieldbus simulation mode – Fieldbus host

DEVICE

INFORMATION

Simulate Mode

Simulate Mode – Set to Enabled to activate simulation mode.

Figure 5-2

Fieldbus simulation mode – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Device (Fieldbus) tab

Select Simulate

Mode

Apply

5.3.2

Sensor simulation mode

Sensor simulation mode causes simulated values to be substituted for actual process data from the sensor. Sensor simulation mode can be enabled only with ProLink II.

108

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Operation

Figure 5-3

Sensor simulation mode – ProLink II

ProLink >

Configuration

Sensor Simulation tab

Select a wave form for mass flow, density, and temperature from the

Wave Form lists

Select Enable

Simulation Mode

Fixed wave

Triangular or sine wave

Enter a value in the

Fixed Value box

Enter period in the

Period box

Enter minimum and maximum amplitude in the Minimum and

Maximum boxes

Apply

5.4

Responding to alarms

The transmitter broadcasts alarms when a process variable exceeds its defined limits or the transmitter

detects a fault condition. For instructions regarding all the possible alarms, see Section 6.9.

5.4.1

Viewing alarms

You can view alarms with a fieldbus host, the display, or ProLink II software.

With a fieldbus host

The transmitter sets its fieldbus output status to bad or uncertain whenever an alarm condition occurs.

A PlantWeb Alert may also be posted. (See Appendix A for information about PlantWeb Alerts.)

When the output status is bad or uncertain, you can view an alarm by reading the following alarm parameters:

• Each AI function block contains a parameter called Block Error that contains the alarm bits for that AI block.

• The DIAGNOSTICS transducer block contains four parameters named Alarm Status 1 through Alarm Status 4. Each of these parameters has a short list of alarm bits (see

Appendix B).

Configuration and Use Manual

109

Operation

With the display

The display reports alarms in two ways:

• With a status LED, which reports only that one or more alarms has occurred

• Through the alarm queue, which reports each specific alarm

Note: If access to the alarm menu from the display has been disabled (see Section 4.18), then the

display will not list alarm codes in an alarm queue and the status LED will not flash. The status LED will indicate status using solid green, yellow, or red.

Figure 5-4

Display alarm menu

Status LED

110

Table 5-4

Priorities reported by the status LED

Status LED state

Green

Flashing green

(1)

Yellow

Flashing yellow

(1)

Red

Flashing red

(1)

Alarm priority

No alarm—normal operating mode

Unacknowledged corrected condition

Acknowledged low severity alarm

Unacknowledged low severity alarm

Acknowledged high severity alarm

Unacknowledged high severity alarm

(1) If the LED blinking option is turned off (see Section 4.18.1), the status LED will flash only during calibration. It will not

flash to indicate an unacknowledged alarm.

Alarms in the alarm queue are arranged according to priority.

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Operation

Figure 5-5

Viewing and acknowledging alarms – Display

Scroll and Select simultaneously for 4 seconds

SEE ALARM

Select

Yes

ACK ALL

(1)

No

Select Scroll

EXIT

Select Scroll

Alarm code

Yes

Active/ unacknowledged alarms?

No

NO ALARM

Scroll Select

ACK

Select

Yes No

Scroll

Scroll

EXIT

(1) ACK ALL will appear only if it has been enabled.

See Section 5.4.

Configuration and Use Manual

111

Operation

With ProLink II

ProLink II provides two ways to view alarm information:

• Choose

ProLink > Status

. This window shows the current status of all possible alarms, independent of configured alarm severity. The alarms are divided into three categories:

Critical, Informational, and Operational. To view the indicators in a category, click on the associated tab. A tab is red if one or more status indicators in that category is active. On each tab, currently active alarms are shown by red indicators.

• Choose

ProLink > Alarm Log

. This window lists all active alarms, and all inactive but unacknowledged Fault and Informational alarms. (The transmitter automatically filters out

Ignore alarms.) A green indicator means “inactive but unacknowledged” and a red indicator means “active.” Alarms are organized into two categories: High Priority and Low Priority.

Note: The location of alarms in the Status and Alarm Log windows are not affected by the configured

alarm severity (see Section 4.11). Alarms in the Status window are predefined as Critical,

Informational, or Operational. Alarms in the Alarm Log window are predefined as High Priority or

Low Priority.

5.4.2

Acknowledging alarms

You can acknowledge alarms using ProLink II or the display. For transmitters with a display, access to the alarm menu can be enabled or disabled, and a password may be required. If access to the alarm menu is enabled, the operator may be disallowed from acknowledging all alarms simultaneously (the

Ack All?

function). See Section 4.18.1 for information on controlling these functions.

If the LED blinking option has been turned off, the status LED will not flash to indicate unacknowledged alarms. Alarms can still be acknowledged.

To acknowledge alarms using the display:

1. Activate and hold

Scroll

and

Select

simultaneously until the words

SEE ALARM

appear on

the screen. See Figure 5-4.

2.

Select

.

3. If the words

NO ALARM

appear, go to Step 8.

4. If you want to acknowledge all alarms: a.

Scroll until the word

ACK

appears by itself. The word

ACK

begins to alternate with the word

ALL?

.

b.

Select

.

Note: If the “acknowledge all alarms” feature has been disabled (see Section 4.18.1, then you must

acknowledge each alarm individually. See Step 5.

5. If you want to acknowledge a single alarm: a.

Scroll until the alarm you want to acknowledge appears.

b.

Select. The word

ALARM

begins to alternate with the word

ACK

.

c.

Select to acknowledge the alarm.

6. If you want to acknowledge another alarm, go to Step 3.

7. If you do NOT want to acknowledge any more alarms, go to Step 8.

8. Scroll until the word

EXIT

appears.

9.

Select

.

112

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Operation

To acknowledge alarms using ProLink II:

1. Click

ProLink > Alarm Log

. Entries in the alarm log are divided into two categories: High

Priority and Low Priority, corresponding to the default Fault and Information alarm severity levels. Within each category:

• All active alarms are listed with a red status indicator.

• All alarms that are “cleared but unacknowledged” are listed with a green status indicator.

2. For each alarm that you want to acknowledge, select the

ACK

checkbox.

5.5

Using the totalizers and inventories

The totalizers keep track of the total amount of mass or volume measured by the transmitter over a period of time. The totalizers can be viewed, started, stopped, and reset.

The inventories track the same values as the totalizers but can be reset separately. Because the inventories and totals are reset separately, you can use the inventories to keep a running total of mass or volume across multiple totalizer resets.

5.5.1

Viewing the totalizers and inventories

You can view the current value of the mass totalizer, volume totalizer, mass inventory, and volume inventory with a fieldbus host, the display, or ProLink II.

With a fieldbus host

If you have set up the INT function block to report the status of one of the internal totalizers or

inventories (see Section 2.4), you can simply read the Out parameter of the INT function block.

You can also view any of the internal totalizers or inventories by inspecting their respective transducer block parameters.

Table 5-5

Totalizer and inventory parameter names

Totalizer/inventory

Mass totalizer

Volume totalizer

Mass inventory

Volume Inventory

Reference volume gas total

(1)

Reference volume gas inventory

(1)

Temperature corrected volume total

Temperature corrected volume inventory

Standard volume total

(2)

Standard volume inventory

(2)

Net mass total

(2)

Transducer block

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

API

API

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

Parameter name

Mass Total: Value

Volume Total: Value

Mass Inventory: Value

Volume Inventory: Value

Gas Volume Total: Value

Gas Volume Inventory: Value

API Corr Volume Total: Value

API Corr Vol Inventory: Value

CM Std Volume Total: Value

CM Std Vol Inventory: Value

CM Net Mass Total: Value

Configuration and Use Manual

113

Operation

Table 5-5

Totalizer and inventory parameter names (continued)

Totalizer/inventory

Net mass inventory

(2)

Net volume total

(2)

Net volume inventory

(2)

Transducer block

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

Parameter name

CM Net Mass Inventory: Value

CM Net Volume Total: Value

CM Net Vol Inventory: Value

(1) Not valid when the petroleum measurement or concentration measurement applications are active.

(2) Not all of these totals are available at one time. The available totals depend on the concentration measurement application configuration.

With the display

You cannot view totalizers or inventories with the display unless the display has been configured to

show them. Refer to Section 4.18.5.

1. To view totalizer values,

Scroll

until the process variable

TOTAL

appears and the units of measure are:

• For the mass totalizer, mass units (e.g., kg, lb)

• For the volume totalizer, volume units (e.g., gal, cuft)

• For petroleum measurement or concentration measurement totalizers, the mass or volume unit alternating with the process variable (e.g.,

TCORR

or

NET M

) (see Table 4-1).

See Figure 5-6. Read the current value from the top line of the display.

2. To view inventory values,

Scroll

until the process variable

TOTAL

appears and:

• For the mass inventory, the word

MASSI

(Mass Inventory) begins to alternate with the units of measure

• For the volume inventory, the word

LVOLI

(Line Volume Inventory) begins to alternate with the units of measure

• For petroleum measurement or concentration measurement inventories, the mass or volume unit alternating with the process variable (e.g.,

TCORI

or

NET VI

) (see Table 4-1).

Read the current value from the top line of the display.

114

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Operation

Figure 5-6

Display totalizer

Process variable

Current value

Scroll

optical switch

Units of measure

Select

optical switch

With ProLink II

To view the current value of the totalizers and inventories with ProLink II, choose:

•

ProLink > Process Variables

to view standard totalizers and inventories

•

ProLink > API Process Variables

to view API totalizers and inventories

•

ProLink > CM Process Variables

to view CM totalizers and inventories

5.5.2

Controlling the totalizers and inventories

Table 5-6

Totalizer and inventory control methods

Function Name

Stop all totalizers and inventories

Start all totalizers and inventories

Reset mass or volume totalizer only

Reset API totalizer only

Reset CM totalizer only

Reset all totalizers

Reset all inventories

Reset individual inventories

Fieldbus host

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

ProLink II

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

(3)

Yes

(3)

Display

(1)

Yes

Yes

Yes

(2)

Yes

(2)

Yes

(2)

No

No

No

(1) These display functions may be enabled or disabled. See Section 4.18.

(2) This function is available only if the corresponding totalizer is configured as a display variable (see Section 4.18.5).

(3) If enabled in the ProLink II preferences.

With a fieldbus host

If you have set up the INT function block to report the status of one of the internal totalizers (i.e., not

Standard mode) (see Section 2.4), you can reset that totalizer by selecting the INT function block and

setting the OP_CMD_INT method parameter to Reset.

Configuration and Use Manual

115

Operation

You can also control the internal totalizers directly by using the method parameters shown in the following table.

Table 5-7

Totalizer/inventory control – Fieldbus host

To accomplish this

Stop all totalizers and inventories

Start all totalizers and inventories

Reset mass totalizer

Reset volume totalizer

Reset gas volume totalizer

Reset API totalizer

Reset CM standard volume totalizer

Reset CM net mass totalizer

Reset CM net volume totalizer

Reset mass inventory

Reset volume inventory

Reset gas volume inventory

Reset API inventory

Reset CM standard volume inventory

Reset CM net mass inventory

Reset CM net volume inventory

Simultaneously reset all totalizers

Simultaneously reset all inventories

Select this transducer block

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

API

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

API

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

CONCENTRATION

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

MEASUREMENT

And use this method parameter

Stop All Totals

Start Totals

Reset Mass Total

Reset Volume Total

Reset Gas Standard Volume Total

Reset API Volume Total

Reset CM Std Volume Total

Reset CM Net Mass Total

Reset CM Net Volume Total

Reset Mass Inventory

Reset Volume Inventory

Reset Gas Standard Volume Inventory

Reset API Inventory

Reset CM Volume Inventory

Reset CM Net Mass Inventory

Reset CM Net Volume Inventory

Reset Totalizers

Reset Inventories

116

With ProLink II

To control CM totalizers and inventories, choose

ProLink > CM Totalizer Control

. To control all other totalizer and inventory functions, choose

ProLink > Totalizer Control

.

To reset inventories using ProLink II, you must first enable this capability. To enable inventory reset using ProLink II:

1. Choose

View > Preferences

.

2. Select the

Enable Inventory Totals Reset

checkbox.

3. Click

Apply

.

With the display

Figure 5-7 shows how you can control the totalizers and inventories with the display.

• Starting or stopping totalizers and inventories will start or stop all totalizers and inventories simultaneously.

• Resetting totalizers resets only the totalizer for which the reset is selected. Inventories cannot be reset using the display.

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Operation

Figure 5-7

Display menu — controlling totalizers and inventories

Process variable display

Scroll

Mass total display

(1)

Scroll

Volume total display

(1)

API total

(1)(2)

ED total

(1)(2)

Select

RESET

(3)

Select

RESET YES?

Select

Yes No

Scroll

Scroll

STOP/START

(4)

Select

STOP/START YES?

Select

Yes No

Scroll

Scroll

EXIT

(1) Displayed only if configured as a display variable (see Section 4.18.5).

(2) The petroleum measurement application or concentration measurement application must be enabled.

(3) The display must be configured to allow totalizer resetting (see Section 4.18).

(4) The display must be configured to allow stopping and starting (see Section 4.18).

Configuration and Use Manual

117

118

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Chapter 6

Troubleshooting

6.1

Overview

This section describes guidelines and procedures for troubleshooting the flowmeter. The information in this section will enable you to:

• Categorize the problem

• Determine whether you are able to correct the problem

• Take corrective measures (if possible)

Note: All procedures provided in this chapter assume that you have established communication with

the transmitter and that you are complying with all applicable safety requirements. See Appendices 2

and 3.

6.2

Guide to troubleshooting topics

Table 6-1

Troubleshooting topics

Topic

Transmitter does not operate

Transmitter does not communicate

Zero or calibration failure

AI block configuration error

Output problems

Lost static data alarm

Status alarms

Diagnosing wiring problems

Checking slug flow

Restoring a working configuration

Checking the test points

Checking the core processor

Checking sensor coils and RTD

Section

Section 6.3

Section 6.4

Section 6.5

Section 6.6

Section 6.7

Section 6.8

Section 6.9

Section 6.10

Section 6.11

Section 6.12

Section 6.13

Section 6.14

Section 6.15

6.3

Transmitter does not operate

If the transmitter is receiving power but all blocks are out of service, see Section 6.8.

If the transmitter is not receiving power and cannot communicate over the network or display, then

perform all of the procedures under Section 6.10. If the wiring checks do not indicate a problem with

electrical connections, contact the Micro Motion Customer Service Department.

Configuration and Use Manual

119

Troubleshooting

6.4

Transmitter does not communicate

If the transmitter fails to communicate:

• Make sure that the entire fieldbus network is grounded only once (individual segments should not be grounded).

•

Perform the procedures under Section 6.10.4.

• If you are using a National Instruments

®

Configurator, perform the procedures under

Section 6.4.1.

• Verify the software version by reading the display at power up.

• Verify the transmitter has fieldbus software loaded into it. At power up, the local display will briefly flash the revision level. For revision 1.0, 1.0 is displayed. For other revisions, x.x F is displayed.

6.4.1

National Instruments basic information

To verify the Dlme Basic Info:

1. Launch the National Instruments Interface Configuration Utility.

2. Select the appropriate port, usually

Port 0

.

3. Click

Edit

.

4. Click

Advanced

.

5. Verify the following information:

•

Slot Time

equals 7

•

Max Response Delay

equals 3

•

Min Inter-Pdu Delay

equals 6

6.5

Zero or calibration failure

If a zero or calibration procedure fails, the transmitter will send one or more status alarms indicating

the cause of failure. Refer to Table 6-3 for descriptions of status alarms and possible remedies.

6.6

AI block configuration error

Configuring the measurement units with ProLink II or the display can cause the transmitter’s AI blocks to get a configuration error unless the AI blocks are also configured for the same measurement units. This is because ProLink II and the display set measurement units in the MEASUREMENT transducer block, not in the AI block. Therefore, if the units have been configured with ProLink II or the display, the AI blocks must be separately configured to match.

See Section 4.4 for more information about configuring measurement units.

120

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Troubleshooting

6.7

Output problems

Micro Motion suggests that you make a record of the process variables listed below, under normal operating conditions. This will help you recognize when the process variables are unusually high or low.

• Flow rate

• Density

• Temperature

• Tube frequency

• Pickoff voltage

• Drive gain

For troubleshooting, check the process variables under both normal flow and tubes-full no-flow conditions. Except for flow rate, you should see little or no change between flow and no-flow conditions. If you see a significant difference, record the values and contact Micro Motion Customer

Service for assistance.

Unusual values for process variables may indicate a variety of different problems.

Table 6-2

Output problems and possible remedies

Symptom

AI block fault

No output or incorrect process variable

Steady non-zero flow rate under no-flow conditions

Cause Possible remedies

Measurement units mismatch Make sure the Transducer Scale: Units

Index parameter matches the units specified in the transducer block for that process variable.

AI Channel parameter set incorrectly Verify the AI Channel parameter in the AI block matches the correct transducer block measurement channels.

Correct the piping.

Misaligned piping (especially in new installations)

Open or leaking valve Check or correct the valve mechanism.

Bad sensor zero

Bad flow calibration factor

Rezero the flowmeter. See Section 2.7.

Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.

Configuration and Use Manual

121

Troubleshooting

Table 6-2

Output problems and possible remedies (continued)

Symptom

Erratic non-zero flow rate under no-flow conditions

Erratic non-zero flow rate when flow is steady

Cause Possible remedies

Wiring problem

Incorrectly grounded 9-wire cable

(only in 9-wire remote and remote core processor with remote transmitter installations)

Noise in fieldbus wiring

Verify all sensor-to-transmitter wiring and ensure the wires are making good contact. Refer to the installation manual.

Verify 9-wire cable installation.

Refer to the installation manual.

Verify that the wiring is properly shielded against noise. Refer to the installation manual.

See Section 6.7.6.

Incorrectly set or bad power conditioner

Vibration in pipeline at rate close to sensor frequency

Leaking valve or seal

Inappropriate measurement unit

Inappropriate damping value

Slug flow

Plugged flow tube

Check the environment and remove the source of vibration.

Check pipeline.

Check measurement units using a fieldbus host.

Check damping. See Section 6.7.1.

See Section 6.11.

Check drive gain and frequency. Purge the flow tubes.

Moisture in sensor junction box (only for 9-wire remote and remote core processor with remote transmitter installations)

Mounting stress on sensor

Sensor cross-talk

Improper sensor grounding

Open junction box and allow it to dry. Do not use contact cleaner. When closing, ensure integrity of gaskets and O-rings, and grease all O-rings.

Check sensor mounting. Ensure that:

• Sensor is not being used to support pipe.

• Sensor is not being used to correct misaligned pipe.

• Sensor is not too heavy for pipe.

Check environment for sensor with similar

(±0.5 Hz) tube frequency.

Check the sensor grounding. Refer to the installation manual.

Incorrect sensor orientation

Output wiring problem

Inappropriate measurement unit

Inappropriate damping value

Excessive or erratic drive gain

Slug flow

Plugged flow tube

Wiring problem

Not all orientations work with all process fluids. See the installation manual for your sensor.

Verify fieldbus wiring.

Check measurement units using a fieldbus tool.

Check damping. See Section 6.7.1.

See Sections 6.13.3 and 6.13.4.

See Section 6.11.

Check drive gain and tube frequency.

Purge the flow tubes. Sensor may need to be replaced.

Verify all sensor-to-transmitter wiring and ensure the wires are making good contact. Refer to the installation manual.

122

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Troubleshooting

Table 6-2

Output problems and possible remedies (continued)

Symptom

Inaccurate flow rate

Cause

Bad flow calibration factor

Inappropriate measurement unit

Bad sensor zero

Bad density calibration factors

Bad flowmeter grounding

Slug flow

Incorrectly set linearization

Wiring problem

Inaccurate density reading Problem with process fluid

Bad density calibration factors

Wiring problem

Bad flowmeter grounding

Slug flow

Sensor cross-talk

Plugged flow tube

Temperature reading significantly different from process temperature

RTD failure

Incorrect calibration factors

Temperature reading slightly different from process temperature

Incorrect calibration factors

Unusually high density reading Plugged flow tube

Unusually low density reading

Unusually high tube frequency

Unusually low tube frequency

Incorrect K2 value

Slug flow

Incorrect K2 value

Sensor erosion

Plugged flow tube

Unusually low pickoff voltages

Unusually high drive gain

Several possible causes

Several possible causes

Possible remedies

Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.

Check measurement units using a fieldbus host.

Rezero the flowmeter. See Section 2.7.

Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.

See Section 6.10.3.

See Section 6.11.

See Section 6.7.7.

Verify all sensor-to-transmitter wiring and ensure the wires are making good contact. Refer to the installation manual.

Use standard procedures to check quality of process fluid.

Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.

Verify all sensor-to-transmitter wiring and ensure the wires are making good contact. Refer to the installation manual.

See Section 6.10.3.

See Section 6.11.

Check environment for sensor with similar

(±0.5 Hz) tube frequency.

Check drive gain and tube frequency.

Purge the flow tubes. Sensor may need to be replaced.

Check for alarm conditions and follow troubleshooting procedure for indicated alarm.

Perform temperature calibration. See

Section 3.7.

Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.

Perform temperature calibration. See

Section 3.7.

Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.

Check drive gain and tube frequency.

Purge the flow tubes. Sensor may need to be replaced.

Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.

See Section 6.11.

Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Check drive gain and tube frequency.

Purge the flow tubes. Sensor may need to be replaced.

See Section 6.13.5.

See Section 6.13.3.

Configuration and Use Manual

123

Troubleshooting

6.7.1

Damping

An incorrectly set damping value may make the transmitter’s output appear too sluggish or too jumpy.

Adjust the Flow Damping, Temperature Damping, and Density Damping parameters in the

MEASUREMENT transducer block to achieve the damping effect you want. See Section 4.12.

Other damping problems

If the transmitter appears to be applying damping values incorrectly or the damping effects do not appear to be changed by adjustments to the damping parameters in the MEASUREMENT transducer block, then the Process Value Filter Time parameter in an AI function block may be improperly set.

Inspect each AI function block, and ensure that the Process Value Filter Time parameter is set to zero.

6.7.2

Flow cutoff

If the transmitter is sending an output of zero unexpectedly, then one of the cutoff parameters may be

set incorrectly. See Section 4.14 for more information about configuring cutoffs.

6.7.3

Output scale

An incorrectly configured output scale can cause the transmitter to report unexpected output levels.

Verify that the Transducer Scale and Output Scale values are set up correctly for each AI block. See

Section 4.9.

6.7.4

Characterization

Incorrect characterization parameters can cause the transmitter to send unexpected output values.

However, you should suspect an incorrect characterization only in specific circumstances (e.g., pairing the transmitter and sensor together for the first time, replacing the core processor). Refer to

Section 3.3 for more information about characterization.

6.7.5

Calibration

Improper calibration may cause the transmitter to send unexpected output values. However, you should suspect an improper calibration only if the transmitter has been field-calibrated recently. Refer

to Section 3.2.4 for more information about calibration.

Note: Micro Motion recommends using meter factors, rather than calibration, to prove the meter against a regulatory standard or to correct measurement error. Contact Micro Motion before

calibrating your flowmeter. Refer to Section 3.5 for information about meter factors.

6.7.6

Fieldbus network power conditioner

An incorrectly set or bad power conditioner can cause inappropriate communication from the transmitter. For the MTL power conditioner, the red switch (dual redundancy) should be set to Normal

Mode. The yellow switch (termination) should be set to Termination In. If you suspect further problems with the power conditioner, contact Micro Motion Customer Service for assistance.

6.7.7

Linearization

The linearization parameter in each AI function block can affect the transmitter’s output. Verify that

the Linearization Type parameter is set correctly. See Section 4.8.

124

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Troubleshooting

6.8

EEPROM Checksum Error

After performing an EEPROM initialization (Initialize NVM) using the Micro Motion Load Utility, the resource block may be out of service.

Use Reset Processor method of the Micro Motion Load Utility to reset all resource blocks and function blocks are initialize.

6.9

Status alarms

Status alarms are reported by a fieldbus host, the display, and ProLink II.

Table 6-3

Status alarms and remedies

Alarm code

A001

Description

(E)EPROM Checksum Error (CP)

A002

A003

A004

A005

A006

A008

RAM Error (CP)

Sensor Failure

Temperature Sensor Failure

Input Overrange

Not Configured

Density Overrange

Possible remedies

Cycle power to the transmitter.

The flowmeter might need service. Contact Micro Motion

Customer Service.

Cycle power to the transmitter.

The flowmeter might need service. Contact Micro Motion

Customer Service.

Check the test points. See Section 6.13.

Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.

Check wiring to sensor. See Section 6.10.2.

Check for slug flow. See Section 6.11.

Check sensor tubes.

Check the test points. See Section 6.13.

Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.

Check wiring to sensor. See Section 6.10.2.

Verify process temperature range is within limits for sensor and transmitter.

Verify flowmeter characterization. See Section 6.7.4.

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Check the test points. See Section 6.13.

Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.

Verify process conditions.

Verify that transmitter is configured to use appropriate

measurement units. See Section 4.4.

Verify flowmeter characterization. See Section 6.7.4.

Re-zero the flowmeter. See Section 2.7.

Check the characterization. Specifically, verify the FCF

and K1 values. See Section 3.3.

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Check the test points. See Section 6.13.

Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.

Check for air in flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in tubes, coating in tubes.

Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.

Configuration and Use Manual

125

Troubleshooting

Table 6-3

Status alarms and remedies (continued)

Alarm code

A009

Description

Transmitter Initializing/warming Up

A010

A011

A012

A013

A014

A016

A017

A018

A019

A020

A021

A025

Calibration Failure

Cal — Too Low

Cal — Too High

Cal — Too Noisy

Transmitter Failed

Line RTD Temperature Out-of-Range

Meter RTD Temperature Out-of-Range

(E)EPROM Checksum Error

RAM or ROM Test Error

Calibration Factors Unentered

Incorrect Sensor Type (K1)

Protected Boot Sector Fault (CP)

Possible remedies

Allow the transmitter to warm up. The error should disappear from the status words once the transmitter is ready for normal operation. If alarm does not clear, make sure sensor is completely full or completely empty. Verify sensor configuration and transmitter wiring to sensor

(refer to installation manual).

If alarm appears during zero, ensure there is no flow through the sensor, then retry.

Cycle power to the flowmeter, then retry.

Ensure there is no flow through sensor, then retry.

Cycle power to the flowmeter, then retry.

Ensure there is no flow through sensor, then retry.

Cycle power to the flowmeter, then retry.

Remove or reduce sources of electromechanical noise, then attempt the calibration or zero procedure again.

Possible sources of noise include:

• Mechanical pumps

• Electrical interference

• Vibration effects from nearby machinery

Cycle power to the flowmeter, then retry.

Cycle power to the transmitter.

The transmitter might need service. Contact Micro Motion

Customer Service.

Check the test points. See Section 6.13.

Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.

Check wiring to sensor. Refer to installation manual.

Make sure the appropriate sensor type is configured.

See Section 3.3.1.

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Check the test points. See Section 6.13.

Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Cycle power to the transmitter.

The transmitter might need service. Contact Micro Motion

Customer Service.

Cycle power to the transmitter.

The transmitter might need service. Contact Micro Motion

Customer Service.

Check the characterization. Specifically, verify the FCF

value. See Section 3.3.

Check the characterization. Specifically, verify the K1

value. See Section 3.3.

Cycle power to the meter.

The transmitter might need service. Contact

Micro Motion Customer Service.

126

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Troubleshooting

A106

A107

A116

A117

A120

A121

A128

Table 6-3

Status alarms and remedies (continued)

Alarm code

A026

A028

A031

A032

A033

A034

A035

A102

A103

A104

A105

A0129

Description

Sensor/Transmitter Communication Error

Core Processor Write Failure

Low Power

Smart Meter Verification In Progress and

Outputs Fixed

Sensor OK / Tubes Stopped by Process

Smart Meter Verification Failed

Smart Meter Verification Aborted

Drive Overrange/Partially Full Tube

Data Loss Possible (Tot and Inv)

Possible remedies

Check wiring between transmitter and core processor

(see Section 6.10.2). The wires may be swapped. After

swapping wires, cycle power to the flowmeter.

Check for noise in wiring or transmitter environment.

Check core processor LED. See Section 6.14.2.

Perform the core processor resistance test. See

Section 6.14.3.

Cycle power to the meter.

The transmitter might need service. Contact

Micro Motion Customer Service.

The core processor is not receiving enough power.

Check the power supply to the transmitter, and check power wiring between the transmitter and the core processor (4-wire remote installations only).

Allow the procedure to complete.

If desired, abort the procedure and restart with outputs set to Continue Measurement.

No signal from LPO or RPO, suggesting that sensor tubes are not vibrating. Verify process. Check for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in tubes, or coating in tubes.

Rerun the test. If the test fails again, see Section 3.4.3.

If desired, read the abort code. See Section 3.4.3, and

perform the appropriate action.

Excessive or erratic drive gain. See Section 6.13.3.

Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.

Cycle power to the transmitter.

The transmitter might need service. Contact Micro Motion

Customer Service.

Calibration-in-Progress

Slug Flow

AI/AO Simulation Active

Allow the flowmeter to complete calibration.

Allow slug flow to clear from the process.

See Section 6.11.

Disable simulation mode. See Section 5.3.1.

Power Reset Occurred No action is necessary.

API: Temperature Outside Standard Range Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

API: Density Outside Standard Range

CM: Unable to Fit Curve Data

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

CM: Extrapolation Alarm

Factory configuration data invalid

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Cycle power to the transmitter.

The flowmeter might need service. Contact Micro Motion

Customer Service.

Factory configuration data checksum invalid Cycle power to the transmitter.

The flowmeter might need service. Contact Micro Motion

Customer Service.s

Configuration and Use Manual

127

Troubleshooting

Table 6-3

Status alarms and remedies (continued)

Alarm code

A131

Description

Smart Meter Verification In Progress

A132 Simulation Mode Active (sensor)

Possible remedies

Allow the procedure to complete.

If desired, abort the procedure and restart with outputs set to Fault.

Disable sensor simulation mode. See Section 5.3.2.

6.10

Diagnosing wiring problems

Use the procedures in this section to check the transmitter installation for wiring problems.

Installation procedures are provided in the Model 1700 and Model 2700 Transmitters: Installation

Manual.

WARNING

Removing the wiring compartment covers in explosive atmospheres while the power is on can cause an explosion.

Before removing the field wiring compartment cover in explosive atmospheres, shut off the power and wait five minutes.

6.10.1

Checking the power-supply wiring

To check the power-supply wiring:

1. Verify that the correct external fuse is used. An incorrect fuse can limit current to the transmitter and keep it from initializing.

2. Power down the transmitter.

3. If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes.

4. Ensure that the power supply wires are connected to the correct terminals. Refer to the installation manual.

5. Verify that the power-supply wires are making good contact and are not clamped to the wire insulation.

6. Inspect the voltage label on the inside of the field-wiring compartment. Verify that the voltage supplied to the transmitter matches the voltage specified on the label.

7. Use a voltmeter to test the voltage at the transmitter’s power supply terminals. Verify that it is within specified limits. For DC power, you may need to size the cable. Refer to the installation manual.

128

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Troubleshooting

6.10.2

Checking the sensor-to-transmitter wiring

Note: This does not apply to flowmeters with an integrally mounted transmitter.

To check the sensor-to-transmitter wiring, verify that:

• The transmitter is connected to the sensor according to the wiring information provided in the installation manual.

• The wires are making good contact with the terminals.

• For 4-wire connections, the mating connector between the core processor and the transmitter is securely plugged into its socket.

If the wires are incorrectly connected:

1. Power down the transmitter.

2. Wait five minutes before opening the transmitter compartment if the transmitter is in a hazardous area.

3. Correct the wiring.

4. Restore power to the transmitter.

6.10.3

Checking the grounding

The sensor and the transmitter must be grounded. If the core processor is installed as part of the transmitter or the sensor, it is grounded automatically. If the core processor is installed separately, it must be grounded separately. Refer to the installation manual.

6.10.4

Checking the communication wiring

To check the communication wiring, verify that:

• Communication wires and connections meet F

OUNDATION

fieldbus wiring standards.

• Wires are connected according to instructions provided in the installation manual.

• Wires are making good contact with the terminals.

6.11

Checking slug flow

The dynamics of slug flow are described in Section 4.13. If the transmitter is reporting a slug flow

alarm, first check the process and possible mechanical causes for the alarm:

• Actual changes in process density

• Cavitation or flashing

• Leaks

• Sensor orientation — sensor tubes should normally be down when measuring liquids, and up when measuring gases. Refer to the sensor documentation for more information about orientation.

If there are no mechanical causes for the slug flow alarm, the slow flow limits and duration may be set too high or too low. The high limit is set by default to 5.0 g/cm

3

, and the low limit is set by default to

0.0 g/cm

3

. Lowering the high limit or raising the low limit will cause the transmitter to be more sensitive to changes in density. If you expect occasional slug flow in your process, you may need to increase the slug flow duration. A longer slug flow duration will make the transmitter more tolerant of slug flow.

Configuration and Use Manual

129

Troubleshooting

6.12

Restoring a working configuration

At times it may be easier to start from a known working configuration than to troubleshoot the existing configuration. To do this, you can:

• Restore a configuration file saved via ProLink II, if one is available. In ProLink II, choose

File > Send to Xmtr from File

.

• Restore the factory configuration (transmitter must be connected to an enhanced core processor).

Neither of these methods will restore all of the transmitter’s configuration. For example, neither method will restore the configuration of the AI, AO, and INT blocks. Using the restore factory configuration option will also not restore such things as the configuration of the display.

Figure 6-1

Restore factory configuration

ProLink >

Configuration

Device (Fieldbus) tab

Restore Factory

Configuration

6.13

Checking the test points

You can diagnose sensor failure or overrange status alarms by checking the flowmeter test points. The

test points include left and right pickoff voltages, drive gain, and tube frequency.

6.13.1

Obtaining the test points

You can obtain the test points with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

With a fieldbus host

The test points are a set of clearly-named parameters in the DIAGNOSTIC transducer block:

• Left pickoff voltage

• Right pickoff voltage

• Tube frequency

• Drive Gain: Value

With ProLink II

To obtain the test points with ProLink II:

1. Choose

ProLink > Diagnostic Information

.

2. Write down the value you find in the

Tube Frequency

box, the

Left Pickoff

box, the

Right

Pickoff

box, and the

Drive Gain

box.

130

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Troubleshooting

6.13.2

Evaluating the test points

Use the following guidelines to evaluate the test points:

•

If the drive gain is at 100%, refer to Section 6.13.3.

•

If the drive gain is unstable, refer to Section 6.13.4.

•

If the value for the left or right pickoff does not equal the appropriate value from Table 6-4,

based on the sensor flow tube frequency, refer to Section 6.13.5.

•

If the values for the left and right pickoffs equal the appropriate values from Table 6-4, based

on the sensor flow tube frequency, contact Micro Motion Customer Service for assistance.

Table 6-4

Sensor pickoff values

Sensor model

(1)

ELITE Model CMF sensors

Model CMF400 I.S.

Model CMF400 with booster amplifier

Model D, DL, and DT sensors

Model F025, F050, and F100 sensors

Model F200 sensors (compact case)

Model F200 sensors (standard case)

Model H025, H050, and H100 sensors

Model H200 sensors

Model R025, R050, or R100 sensor

Model R200 sensor

Micro Motion T-Series sensors

Pickoff value

3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency

2.7 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency

3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency

3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency

3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency

2.0 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency

3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency

3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency

2.0 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency

3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency

2.0 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency

0.5 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency

(1) If your sensor model is not listed, contact Micro Motion Customer Support.

6.13.3

Excessive drive gain

Table 6-5

Excessive drive gain causes and solutions

Cause

Excessive slug flow

Plugged flow tube

Cavitation or flashing

Solution

Eliminate slugs.

Change the sensor orientation.

Purge the flow tubes. Sensor may need to be replaced.

Increase inlet or back pressure at the sensor.

If a pump is located upstream from the sensor, increase the distance between the pump and sensor.

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Drive board or module failure, cracked flow tube, or sensor imbalance

Mechanical binding at sensor

Open drive or left pickoff sensor coil

Flow rate out of range

Incorrect sensor characterization

Ensure sensor is free to vibrate.

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Ensure flow rate is within sensor limits.

Verify characterization. See Section 3.3.

Configuration and Use Manual

131

Troubleshooting

6.13.4

Erratic drive gain

Table 6-6

Erratic drive gain causes and solutions

Cause

Wrong K1 characterization constant for sensor

Solution

Re-enter the K1 characterization constant. See

Section 3.3.

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Polarity of pick-off reversed or polarity of drive reversed

Slug flow

Foreign material caught in flow tubes

Verify flow tubes are completely filled with process fluid, and that slug flow limits and duration are properly

configured. See Section 6.11.

Purge flow tubes. Sensor may need to be replaced.

6.13.5

Low pickoff voltage

Table 6-7

Low pickoff voltage causes and solutions

Cause

Faulty wiring runs between the sensor and core processor

Process flow rate beyond the limits of the sensor

Slug flow

No tube vibration in sensor

Process beyond the limits of the sensor

Moisture in the sensor electronics

The sensor is damaged

Solution

Refer to the sensor manual and the transmitter installation manual.

Verify that the process flow rate is not out of range of the sensor

Verify the flow tubes are completely filled with process fluid, and that slug flow limits and duration are properly

configured. See Section 6.11.

Check for plugging.

Ensure sensor is free to vibrate (no mechanical binding).

Verify wiring.

Test coils at sensor. See Section 6.15.

Verify that the process flow rate is not out of range of the sensor.

Eliminate the moisture in the sensor electronics.

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

132

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Troubleshooting

6.14

Checking the core processor

Two core processor procedures are available:

• You can check the core processor LED. The core processor has an LED that indicates different flowmeter conditions.

• You can perform the core processor resistance test to check for a damaged core processor.

For both tests you will need to expose the core processor.

6.14.1

Exposing the core processor

Follow these procedures to expose the core processor.

1. Determine your installation type. See Appendix D.

2. If you have a 4-wire remote installation or a remote core processor with remote transmitter installation, simply remove the core processor lid. The core processor is intrinsically safe and can be opened in all environments.

3. If you have an integral installation: a.

Loosen the four cap screws that fasten the transmitter to the base (Figure 6-2).

b.

Rotate the transmitter counter-clockwise so that the cap screws are in the unlocked position.

c.

Gently lift the transmitter straight up, disengaging it from the cap screws. Do not disconnect or damage the wires that connect the transmitter to the core processor.

4. If you have a 9-wire remote installation: a.

Remove the end-cap.

b.

Inside the core processor housing, loosen the three screws that hold the core processor mounting plate in place. Do not remove the screws. Rotate the mounting plate so that the screws are in the unlocked position.

c.

Holding the tab on the mounting plate, slowly lower the mounting plate so that the top of the core processor is visible. Do not disconnect or damage the wires that connect the core processor to the transmitter.

Figure 6-2

Integral installation components

Transmitter

Core processor

4 × cap screws

When reassembling components, take care not to pinch or stress the wires. Grease all O-rings.

Configuration and Use Manual

133

Troubleshooting

6.14.2

Checking the core processor LED

Do not shut off power to the transmitter when checking the core processor LED. To check the core processor LED:

1. Expose the core processor according to the instructions in Section 6.14.1.

2. Check the core processor LED against the conditions listed in Table 6-8 (standard core processor) or Table 6-9 (enhanced core processor).

Table 6-8

Standard core processor LED behavior, flowmeter conditions, and remedies

LED behavior

1 flash per second

(75% off, 25% on)

1 flash per second

(25% off, 75% on)

Solid on

Condition

Normal operation

Slug flow

Possible remedy

No action required

See Section 6.11.

3 rapid flashes followed by a pause

Zero or calibration in progress

If zero or calibration procedure is in progress, no action is required. If these procedures are not in progress, contact Micro

Motion Customer Service.

Check power supply to transmitter. See Section 6.10.1.

Core processor receiving between

11.5 and 5 volts

Sensor not recognized

Check wiring between transmitter and sensor (9-wire remote installation or remote core processor with remote transmitter installation). Refer to the installation manual.

Verify characterization. See Section 3.3.

Improper configuration

Broken pin between sensor and core processor

4 flashes per second Fault condition

OFF Core processor receiving less than

5 volts

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Core processor internal failure

Check alarm status.

Verify power supply wiring to core processor. Refer to the installation manual.

If status LED is lit, transmitter is receiving power. Check voltage across terminals 1 (VDC+) and 2 (VDC–) in core processor.

Normal reading is approximately 14 VDC. If reading is normal, internal core processor failure is possible — contact Micro Motion

Customer Service. If reading is 0, internal transmitter failure is possible — contact Micro Motion Customer Service. If reading is less than 1 VDC, verify power supply wiring to core processor.

Wires may be switched. Refer to the installation manual.

If status LED is not lit, transmitter is not receiving power. Check power supply. If power supply is operational, internal transmitter, display, or LED failure is possible. Contact Micro Motion Customer

Service.

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

134

Table 6-9

Enhanced core processor LED behavior, meter conditions, and remedies

LED behavior

Solid green

Flashing yellow

Solid yellow

Condition

Normal operation

Zero in progress

Low severity alarm

Possible remedy

No action required.

If calibration is in progress, no action required. If no calibration is in progress, contact Micro Motion.

Check alarm status.

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Troubleshooting

Table 6-9

Enhanced core processor LED behavior, meter conditions, and remedies (continued)

LED behavior

Solid red

Flashing red (80% on,

20% off)

Condition

High severity alarm

Tubes not full

Flashing red (50% on,

50% off)

Flashing red (50% on,

50% off, skips every

4th)

OFF

Electronics failed

Sensor failed

Core processor receiving less than 5 volts

Possible remedy

Check alarm status.

If alarm A105 (slug flow) is active, see Section 6.11.

If alarm A033 (tubes not full) is active, verify process. Check for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in tubes, or coating in tubes.

Contact Micro Motion.

Contact Micro Motion.

Core processor internal failure

• Verify power supply wiring to core processor

.

Refer to

Appendix D for diagrams.

• If transmitter status LED is lit, transmitter is receiving power.

Check voltage across terminals 1 (VDC+) and 2 (VDC–) in core processor. If reading is less than 1 VDC, verify power supply wiring to core processor. Wires may be switched.

See Section 6.10.1. Otherwise, contact Micro Motion.

• If transmitter status LED is not lit, transmitter is not

receiving power. Check power supply. See Section 6.10.1.

If power supply is operational, internal transmitter, display, or LED failure is possible. Contact Micro Motion.

Contact Micro Motion.

6.14.3

Core processor resistance test

To perform the core processor resistance test:

1. Disconnect power to the transmitter and core processor.

2. Expose the core processor according to the instructions in Section 6.14.1.

3. Measure the resistance across the following terminal pairs:

• The resistance across terminals 3 and 4 (RS-485A and RS-485B) should be 40–50 kohms.

• The resistance across terminals 2 and 3 (VDC– and RS-485A) should be 20–25 kohms.

• The resistance across terminals 2 and 4 (VDC– and RS-485B) should be 20–25 kohms.

If any of the resistance measurements are lower than specified, the core processor may not be able to communicate with a transmitter or remote host. Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Configuration and Use Manual

135

Troubleshooting

6.15

Checking sensor coils and RTD

Problems with sensor coils can cause several alarms, including sensor failure and a variety of out-of-range conditions. Checking the sensor coils involves testing the terminal pairs and testing for shorts to case.

6.15.1

9-wire remote or remote core processor with remote transmitter installation

If you have a 9-wire remote or a remote core processor with remote transmitter installation:

1. Power down the transmitter.

2. If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes.

3. Remove the end-cap from the core processor housing.

4. Unplug the terminal blocks from the terminal board.

5. Using a digital multimeter (DMM), check the circuits listed in the following table by placing the DMM leads on the unplugged terminal blocks for each terminal pair.

Table 6-10

Circuit terminal pairs

Circuit

Drive coil

Left pickoff coil (LPO)

Right pickoff coil (RPO)

Resistance temperature detector (RTD)

Lead length compensator (LLC) (All sensors except CMF400 IS and T-Series)

Composite RTD (T-Series only)

Fixed resistor (CMF400 IS only)

Test terminal pair

Brown to red

Green to white

Blue to gray

Yellow to violet

Yellow to orange

6. There should be no open circuits (i.e., no infinite resistance readings). The LPO and RPO readings should be the same or very close (±5 ohms). If there are any unusual readings, repeat the coil measurement tests at the sensor junction box to eliminate the possibility of faulty cable. The readings for each coil pair should match at both ends.

If the cable is faulty, replace the cable.

7. Leave the core processor terminal blocks disconnected. At the sensor, remove the lid of the junction box and test each sensor terminal for a short to case by placing one DMM lead on the terminal and the other lead on the sensor case. With the DMM set to its highest range, there should be infinite resistance on each lead. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short to case.

136

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Troubleshooting

8. Test the terminal pairs as follows:

• Brown against all other terminals except Red

• Red against all other terminals except Brown

• Green against all other terminals except White

• White against all other terminals except Green

• Blue against all other terminals except Gray

• Gray against all other terminals except Blue

• Orange against all other terminals except Yellow and Violet

• Yellow against all other terminals except Orange and Violet

• Violet against all other terminals except Yellow and Orange

Note: D600 sensors and CMF400 sensors with booster amplifiers have different terminal pairs.

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service for assistance.

There should be infinite resistance for each pair. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short between terminals.

9. Check for possible causes and solutions.

Table 6-11

Sensor and cable short to case possible causes and remedies

Possible cause

Moisture inside the sensor junction box

Liquid or moisture inside the sensor case

Internally shorted feedthrough (sealed passage for wiring from sensor to sensor junction box)

Faulty cable

Improper wire termination

Solution

Make sure that the junction box is dry and no corrosion is present.

Contact Micro Motion.

Contact Micro Motion.

Replace cable.

Verify wire terminations inside sensor junction box. See the

Micro Motion 9-Wire Flowmeter Cable Preparation and

Installation Guide or the sensor documentation.

10. If the problem is not resolved, contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

Note: When reassembling the meter components, be sure to grease all O-rings.

6.15.2

4-wire remote or integral installation

If you have a 4-wire remote installation or an integral installation:

1. Power down the transmitter.

2. If the transmitter is in a hazardous environment, wait five minutes.

3. If you have a 4-wire remote installation, remove the core processor lid.

4. If you have an integral installation: a.

Loosen the four cap screws that fasten the transmitter to the base (Figure 6-2).

b.

Rotate the transmitter counter-clockwise so that the cap screws are in the unlocked position.

c.

Gently lift the transmitter straight up, disengaging it from the base.

Note: You have the option of disconnecting the 4-wire cable or leaving it connected.

Configuration and Use Manual

137

Troubleshooting

5. If you have a standard core processor, loosen the captive screw (2,5 mm) at the center of the core processor. Carefully remove the core processor from the sensor by grasping it and lifting it straight up. Do not twist or rotate the core processor.

6. If you have an enhanced core processor, loosen the two captive screws (2,5 mm) that hold the core processor in the housing. Gently lift the core processor out of the housing, then disconnect the sensor cable from the feedthrough pins. Do not damage the feedthrough pins.

CAUTION

If the core processor (feedthrough) pins are bent, broken, or damaged in any way, the core processor will not operate.

To avoid damage to the core processor (feedthrough) pins:

• Do not twist or rotate the core processor when lifting it.

• When replacing the core processor (or sensor cable) on the pins, be sure to align the guide pins and mount the core processor (or sensor cable) carefully.

7. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to check the resistance across the right and left pickoff coils.

See Figure 6-3. Neither pair should be an open circuit (i.e., infinite resistance). The resistance

values should be the same or very close (±5 ohms).

8. Use the DMM to check the resistance across the RTD and LLC (lead length compensation)

circuits. See Figure 6-3. Neither pair should be an open circuit (i.e., infinite resistance).

9. Test for a ground to case by checking the resistance between each pin and the sensor case.

With the DMM set to its highest range, there should be infinite resistance on each lead. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short to case.

If a short to case is indicated, check for moisture or corrosion. If you are unable to determine the source of the problem, contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

10. Test for shorts across terminals by testing resistance across the following terminal pairs (see

Figures 6-3 and 6-4). There should be infinite resistance in each case. If there is any resistance

at all, there is a short between the terminals.

• Brown against all other terminals except Red

• Red against all other terminals except Brown

• Green against all other terminals except White

• White against all other terminals except Green

• Blue against all other terminals except Gray

• Gray against all other terminals except Blue

• Orange against all other terminals except Yellow and Violet

• Yellow against all other terminals except Orange and Violet

• Violet against all other terminals except Yellow and Orange

Note: D600 sensors and CMF400 sensors with booster amplifiers have different terminal pairs.

Contact Micro Motion Customer Service for assistance.

If a short between terminals is indicated, contact Micro Motion Customer Service.

138

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Troubleshooting

Figure 6-3

Sensor pins – Standard core processor

Right pickoff

( – )

Lead length compensator

(1)

( + )

Right pickoff

( + )

Left pickoff

( – )

Resistance temperature detector return /

Lead length compensator

(common)

Left pickoff

( + )

Resistance temperature detector

( + )

Drive

( – )

Drive

( + )

(1) LLC for all sensors except T-Series and CMF400 I.S. For T-Series sensors, functions as composite RTD. For CMF400 I.S. sensors, functions as fixed resistor.

Figure 6-4

Sensor pins – Enhanced core processor

Drive – Drive +

Return for RTD, LLC, composite RTD, or fixed resistor

RTD +

LLC / Composite RTD /

Fixed resistor

(1)

Right pickoff +

Left pickoff –

Left pickoff + Right pickoff –

(1) Lead length compensator (LLC) for all sensors except T-Series, CMF400 I.S., and F300. For T-Series sensors, functions as composite RTD. For CMF400 I.S. and F300 sensors, functions as fixed resistor.

Note: The pins are shown as they appear while looking at the feedthrough on the sensor.

Configuration and Use Manual

139

Troubleshooting

Reinstalling the core processor

If you removed the core processor, replace the core processor according to the instructions below.

1. If you have a standard core processor: a.

Align the three guide pins on the bottom of the core processor with the corresponding holes in the base of the core processor housing.

b.

Carefully mount the core processor on the pins, taking care not to bend any pins.

2. If you have an enhanced core processor: a.

Plug the sensor cable onto the feedthrough pins, being careful not to bend or damage any pins.

b.

Replace the core processor in the housing.

3. Tighten the captive screw(s) to 6 to 8 in-lbs (0,7 to 0,9 N-m) of torque.

4. If you have a 4-wire remote installation, replace the core processor lid.

5. If you have an integral installation: a.

Gently lower the transmitter onto the base, inserting the cap screws into the slots. Do not pinch or stress the wires.

b.

Rotate the transmitter clockwise so that the cap screws are in the locked position.

c.

Tighten the cap screws, torquing to 20 to 30 in-lbs (2,3 to 3,4 N-m).

Note: When reassembling the flowmeter components, grease all O-rings.

140

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Appendix A

PlantWeb Alerts

A.1

PlantWeb Alerts explained

Intelligent Emerson field devices (such as the Micro Motion Model 2700 with F

OUNDATION

fieldbus) possess advanced diagnostic features. PlantWeb Alerts help operators take control of this diagnostic information by informing the operator of device issues and providing support guidance for dealing with these issues.

PlantWeb Alerts are divided into three categories:

• Advisory – Allow maintenance to address a problem before it impacts operations. These alerts are presented to maintenance personnel as an aid to maintenance planning.

• Maintenance – Indicate a malfunction has occurred (or is about to occur), and what the effects might be.

• Failed – Indicate a failure has occurred which renders the device inoperative.

A.2

Setting PlantWeb Alerts

Table A-1

Setting PlantWeb Alerts

PlantWeb

Alert

Density out of range

What the alert is detecting

The measured density has exceeded the sensor defined limits.

Default alert category

Failed

Related parameters (and defaults) Guidelines for setting

D1, D2, K1, K2, FD,

DTC, Tube Frequency,

Drive Gain, LPO,

RPO, process density

Process flow rate

Refer to Section 3.2.1 for

characterization information.

Mass flow out of range

Calibration failed

The measured mass flow has exceeded the sensor defined limits.

The calibration attempted by the user failed.

Failed

Failed

Tube not full

Slug flow

Drive out of range

There is no signal from the left or right pickoffs.

Failed

Entrained gas in a liquid process or condensation in a gas process has caused the density to exceed the configured slug limits.

The drive needed to operate the sensors has exceeded the optimal point.

Maintenance

Maintenance

Process flow rate, process density, process temperature

Tube Frequency, Drive

Gain, LPO, RPO, process density

Slug Low Limit (0.0),

Slug High Limit (5.0),

Slug Duration (1.0),

Drive Gain, process density

Drive Gain, LPO,

RPO, process density

See Section 6.5.

Refer to Sections 4.13 and

6.11 for more information

about slug flow.

Configuration and Use Manual

141

PlantWeb Alerts

Table A-1

Setting PlantWeb Alerts (continued)

PlantWeb

Alert

API: Process variable out of range

Sensor not responding

What the alert is detecting

The process temperature or density is outside the

API-defined extrapolation limits.

The sensor is not functioning properly.

Default alert category

Maintenance

Failed

Related parameters (and defaults)

None

LPO, RPO, Live Zero,

Drive Gain, Tube

Frequency

Line RTD, Meter RTD, process temperature

Sensor temperature out of range

Transmitter not characterized

CM: Unable to fit curve data

Either the temperature reading from the RTD on the sensor tube or sensor case is outside the normal operating limits.

The transmitter has not had the proper flow or density calibration parameters entered from the sensor tag or flow calibration sheet.

The data entered as inputs to the curve fit yield unacceptable errors in the fit.

The Smart Meter

Verification procedure has unexpectedly failed.

Smart Meter

Verification failed

Smart Meter

Verification aborted

CM:

Extrapolation alarm

Calibration in progress

Sensor simulate active

Electronics failure Device

The Smart Meter

Verification procedure was aborted by the user.

The process temperature or process density is outside the user-defined extrapolation limits.

There is a calibration (zero, density, temperature, or

Meter Verification) in progress. If Meter

Verification is in progress, the outputs are held at last measured value.

Sensor simulate mode is active.

Electronics failure ASIC

Transmitter initializing/ warming up

The core processor or transmitter has experienced either an

EEPROM, RAM, boot sector or real-timer interrupt failure.

Transmitter RAM Error,

Manufacturing Block checksum fail

The transmitter is undergoing its initial startup routines.

Failed

Failed

Failed

Maintenance

Maintenance

Maintenance

Advisory

Advisory

Failed

Failed

Failed

K1, K2, FCF

Process density, process temperature

Guidelines for setting

Refer to Section 3.3 for

characterization information.

CM curve parameters

Refer to Section 4.7.

None

None

None

None

None

None

142

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

PlantWeb Alerts

Table A-1

Setting PlantWeb Alerts (continued)

PlantWeb

Alert

What the alert is detecting

Core processor/ transmitter communication failure

ECP low power

There is a communication failure between the core processor and the transmitter.

The enhanced core processor is not receiving enough power.

Possible data loss

Electronics failure Hornet

The core processor was unable to successfully store the totalizers on the last power down.

Perform Restart Processor.

If problem persists, call

Micro Motion

NV Memory

Failure

Perform Restart Processor.

If problem persists, call

Micro Motion

Check function Check Transducer Block

Mode

Factory configuration checksum invalid

Factory configuration invalid

Factory configuration data check sum is failed. The data might be corrupted.

The Factory configuration data is changed.You can save the current configuration as factory configuration

Default alert category

Failed

Failed

Maintenance

Failed

Failed

Advisory

Failed

Advisory

Related parameters (and defaults)

None

None

None

None

Failed

Advisory

Failed

Advisory

Guidelines for setting

Refer to Product Data Sheet for transmitter power requirements.

Temperature over range missing.

A.3

Using PlantWeb Alerts

Table A-2 shows information required for using PlantWeb Alerts with the Micro Motion Model 2700

with F

OUNDATION

fieldbus. Table A-3 shows the status of AI and AO block outputs under various

combinations of transducer block modes and PlantWeb Alerts.

Configuration and Use Manual

143

PlantWeb Alerts

Table A-2

Using PlantWeb Alerts

PlantWeb

Alert

What the Alert is detecting

Default alert category Effect on device

Recommended action/help

Density out of range

Mass flow out of range

Calibration failed

Tube not full

Slug flow

Drive out of range

API: Process variable out of range

The measured density has exceeded the sensor defined limits.

The measured mass flow has exceeded the sensor defined limits.

The zero or density calibration attempted by the user failed.

There is no signal from the left or right pickoffs.

The process temperature or density is outside the

API-defined extrapolation limits.

Failed Density measurement unavailable.

Mass flow measurement unavailable.

Measurements are wrong or erratic.

Entrained gas in a liquid process or condensation in a gas process has caused the density to exceed the configured slug limits.

Maintenance Measurements may be incorrect. If temporary or expected, this can be ignored.

The drive needed to operate the sensors has exceeded the optimal point.

Failed

Failed

Failed

Maintenance

Maintenance

Device may not be properly calibrated or zeroed.

Flowmeter continues to function normally, but there may be a problem.

API measurements may be incorrect.

• Check for partially filled or blocked flow tubes.

• Check process to ensure density is correct.

• Verify all characterization parameters are correct, especially density factors.

• Perform a density calibration.

• Check process to ensure mass flow is correct.

• Verify characterization parameters are correct.

• Zero the flowmeter.

• If zeroing, verify there is no flow.

• If performing an FD cal, verify there is sufficient flow.

• Cycle power to the transmitter, then try recalibrating the transmitter.

• Eliminate mechanical noise.

Check for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in tubes, or coating in tubes.

In a liquid process, check process for cavitation, flashing or leaks. In a gas process, check temperature and pressure to verify gas is not condensing. If slug condition occurred while batching, actual product delivered may not match target. Monitor density and try to resolve process problems. If slug condition persists, reconfigure slug limits and/or slug timeout.

• Purge the flow tubes

• Increase inlet or back pressure at the sensor

• Change sensor orientation

• If no other alert is active, this condition can be ignored.

Check the API configuration.

144

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

PlantWeb Alerts

Table A-2

Using PlantWeb Alerts (continued)

PlantWeb

Alert

Sensor not responding

Sensor temperature out of range

What the Alert is detecting

The sensor is not functioning properly.

Default alert category

Failed

Either the temperature reading from the RTD on the sensor tube or sensor case is outside the normal operating limits.

Failed

Effect on device

Recommended action/help

Incorrect or unusable data.

Bad temperature reading. This may adversely affect CM and

API variables.

Measurements may be incorrect.

This CM curve is not usable.

• Check sensor wiring.

• Check test points.

• Purge flow tubes.

• Verify characterization parameters are correct.

• Check sensor wiring.

There may be an open or short lead length compensator or an open or short RTD in the sensor. If open or short is at transmitter, repair. If open or short is at sensor, return to Micro

Motion.

• Verify process fluid temperature is within sensor specifications.

Check the characterization.

Specifically, verify the Flow

Cal Factors, K1 and K2 values.

Check the curve data.

Transmitter not characterized

CM: Unable to fit curve data

The transmitter has not had the proper flow or density calibration parameters entered from the sensor tag or flow calibration sheet.

The data entered as inputs to the curve fit yield unacceptable errors in the fit.

The meter verification routine is in progress.

Meter verification in progress

CM: Extrapolation alarm

The process temperature or process density is outside the user-defined extrapolation limits.

Calibration in progress

There is a calibration (zero, density, temperature, or meter verification) in progress.

Failed

Failed

Failed Outputs held at last measured values.

Maintenance CM variables may be incorrect or unusable.

Advisory

Sensor simulate active

Transmitter initializing/ warming up

Electronics failure Device

Sensor simulate mode is active.

The transmitter is undergoing its initial startup routines.

Advisory

Failed

Failed

Wait until meter verification routine is complete.

Check enhanced density configuration data.

If meter verification is in progress, the outputs are held at last measured values.

Otherwise, no effect.

Outputs are fixed.

Allow the calibration to complete.

Temporary unavailability.

A valid measurement cannot be calculated until the startup phase is complete.

None

Disable sensor simulate mode.

Allow the transmitter to warm up. The error should go away when the transmitter is ready for normal operation.

Electronics failure Hornet

The core processor or transmitter has experienced either an EEPROM, RAM, boot sector or real-timer interrupt failure.

Perform Restart Processor.

If problem persists, call

Micro Motion

Failed None

Configuration and Use Manual

145

PlantWeb Alerts

Table A-2

Using PlantWeb Alerts (continued)

PlantWeb

Alert

Core processor/ transmitter communication failure

ECP low power

What the Alert is detecting

There is a communication failure between the core processor and the transmitter.

The enhanced core processor is not receiving enough power.

Default alert category

Failed

Failed

Effect on device

Inoperable.

Inoperable.

Possible data loss

Electronics failure Hornet

NV Memory

Failure

Check function

Factory configuration checksum invalid

Factory configuration invalid

The core processor was unable to successfully store the totalizers on the last power down.

Maintenance Potential loss of information. The core processor must rely on the totals that were previously saved in the device up to 2 hours before the power was lost.

Failed None Perform Restart Processor.

If problem persists, call

Micro Motion

NV memory data check sum invalid. NV data might be corrupt.

Check Transducer Block

Mode

Failed

Advisory

Failed

Advisory

Perform Restart Processor.

If problem persists, call

Micro Motion

The Factory configuration data is changed.You can save the current configuration as factory configuration

Failed

Advisory

Recommended action/help

Verify the wiring between the transmitter and the core processor. Cycle power to the transmitter. If the problem persists, contact Micro Motion.

Check the power supply to the transmitter. Check the wiring between the transmitter and the core processor.

Contact Micro Motion for a transmitter software upgrade.

Table A-3

AI / AO block status

Transducer block mode (Actual)

OOS

Man

Auto

Auto

Auto

Auto

Active PlantWeb Alerts

No effect

No effect

Fail

Maint., no Fail

Advisory only

None

AI / AO status

Bad

Bad

Bad

Uncertain

Good

Good

AI / AO substatus

Device failure

Non-specific

Non-specific

Non-specific

Non-specific

Non-specific

146

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Appendix B

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

B.1

Overview

The Micro Motion Model 2700 transmitter has seven separate transducer blocks.

B.1.1

Transducer block names

Throughout this manual, the transducer blocks are referred to by their tag (e.g., MEASUREMENT).

Fieldbus hosts that do not support the use of tags as block names will instead show the name

TRANSDUCER followed by a numeric code. Table B-1 shows the relationship between transducer

block tag names and codes, and gives the table number where the parameters and views are described in this appendix.

Table B-1

Transducer block tag names, code names, and table numbers

Tag name Code Name

MEASUREMENT TB 1200

CALIBRATION TB 1400

Transducer 1200

Transducer 1400

DIAGNOSTICS TB 1600 Transducer 1600

DEVICE INFORMATION TB 1800 Transducer 1800

LOCAL DISPLAY TB 2000

API TB 2200

Transducer 2000

Transducer 2200

ENHANCED DENSITY TB 2400 Transducer 2400

Parameters

Table B-2

Table B-4

Table B-6

Table B-8

Table B-10

Table B-12

Table B-14

Views

Table B-3

Table B-5

Table B-7

Table B-9

Table B-11

Table B-13

Table B-15

B.2

MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters

Following are the parameters (Table B-2) and views (Table B-3) for the MEASUREMENT transducer

block.

Configuration and Use Manual

147

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-2

MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

ST_REV

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

XD_ERROR

Definition

Beginning of the transducer block

Message

Type

VARIABLE

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

DS_64(5) N/A S N/A

The revision level of the static data associated with the function block.

Incremented with each write of static store.

The user description of the intended application of the block.

The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks.

This data is not checked or processed by the block.

The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc.

The actual, target, permitted and normal modes of the block.

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

N/A

STRING OCTET

STRING

(32)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

N/A

VARIABLE Unsigned8

(1)

RECORD DS-69 (4)

N/A

N/A

N/A

This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components associated with a block.

Used for all config,

H/W, connection failure or system problems in the block.

STRING BIT

STRING (2)

VARIABLE Unsigned8

(1)

N/A

N/A

S

S

S

S mix

D/20

D

0

YES Spaces “

YES

YES

YES

—

—

0

0

Auto

1

1

8

9

Process Variables Data

MFLOW

MFLOW_UNITS

Mass Flow Rate

Standard or special mass flow rate unit

VARIABLE

ENUM

DS-65 (5)

Unsigned16

(2)

R-0247

-0248

D/20

R-0039 S

0

YES g/s

Enumerated List of Values

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R

N/A

N/A

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R

Any 32 Characters

N/A

1 to 255

See section 2/6 of

FF-891

See section 4.8 of

FF-903

R 18 = Process

Error

19 = Configuration

Error

20 = Electronics

Failure

21 = Sensor

Failure

1318

R N/A

R/W

(OOS)

1318 = g/s

1319 = g/min

1320 = g/hr

1322 = kg/s

1323 = kg/min

1324 = kg/hr

1325 = kg/day

1327 = t/min

1328 = t/h

1329 = t/d

1330 = lb/s

1331 = lb/min

1332 = lb/hr

1333 = lb/day

1335 = Ston/min

1336 = Ston/hr

1337 = Ston/day

1340 = Lton/hr

1341 = Lton/day

253 = Special units

148

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-2

MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)

10 MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNI

11

Parameter Mnemonic

T_BASE

MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNI

T_TIME

Definition

Base Mass Unit

Base time unit for special mass unit

Message

Type

ENUM

ENUM

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

R-132

R-133

S

S

12

13

14

15

MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNI

T_CONV

MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNI

T_STR

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE_UNITS

Special mass unit conversion factor

Special mass flow unit string

Temperature

Temperature Unit

VARIABLE

ENUM

FLOAT (4)

STRING VISIBLE

STRING (8)

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

R-237 —

238

R-52 —

55

S

S

R-0251

— 0252

D/20

Unsigned16

(2)

R-0041 S

YES 1

YES NONE

–

YES

C



1001

16

17

18

DENSITY

DENSITY_UNITS

VOL_FLOW

Density

Density Unit

Volume flow rate

VARIABLE

ENUM

DS-65 (5)

Unsigned16

(2)

R-0249

— 0250

D/20

R-0040 S

–

YES g/cm

3

VARIABLE DS-65 (5) R-0253

-0254

D/20

YES

YES g s

–

1089

1054

1.0

NONE

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

Enumerated List of Values

1089 = Grams

1088 = Kilograms

1092 = Metric

Tons

1094 = Pounds

1095 = Short tons

1096 = long tons

1058 = Minutes

1054 = Seconds

1059 = Hours

1060 = Days

N/A R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R

Any 8 characters

N/A

1100

R/W

(OOS)

R

1000 = K

1001 = Deg C

1002 = Deg F

1003 = Deg R

N/A

R/W

(OOS)

R

1097 = kg/m3

1100 = g/cm3

1103 = kg/L

1104 = g/ml

1105 = g/L

1106 = lb/in3

1107 = lb/ft3

1108 = lb/gal

1109 = Ston/yd3

1113 = DegAPI

1114 = SGU

N/A

Configuration and Use Manual

149

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-2

MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)

20

21

Parameter Mnemonic

VOL_SPECIAL_UNIT_B

ASE

VOL

_SPECIAL_UNIT_TIME

Definition

19 VOLUME_FLOW_UNITS Standard or special volume flow rate unit

Base Volume Unit

Base time unit for special volume unit

Message

Type

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

Unsigned16

(2)

R-

0042

S

Unsigned16

(2)

R -133 S

Unsigned16

(2)

R — 134 S

22

26

VOL

_SPECIAL_UNIT_CONV

23 VOL

_SPECIAL_UNIT_STR

24 MASS_TOT_INV_SPECI

AL_ STR

25 VOLUME_TOT_INV_

SPECIAL_ STR

FLOW_DAMPING

27 TEMPERATURE_DAMPI

NG

28 DENSITY_DAMPING

29 MFLOW_M_FACTOR

Special volume unit conversion factor

Special volume unit string

Special mass total and inventory unit string

Special volume total and inventory unit string

Flow rate (Mass and

Volume) internal damping (seconds)

Temperature internal damping (seconds)

Density internal damping (seconds)

Mass Rate Factor

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

STRING

STRING

STRING

VISIBLE

STRING (8)

VISIBLE

STRING(8)

VISIBLE

STRING (8)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

R — 239

— 240

S

R — 60 —

63

R -56 —

59

R -64 —

67

S

S

S

R-189

-190

R-191

-192

R 193

-194

R-279-

0280

S

S

S

S

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NONE

NONE

YES NONE

YES l/s

1 s

1

0.8

1351

1038

1054

1.0

NONE

NONE

NONE

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

Enumerated List of Values

1347 = m3/s

1348 = m 3/min

1349 = m3/hr

1350 = m3/day

1351 = L/s

1352 = L/min

1353 = L/hr

1355 = Ml/day

1356 = CFS

1357 = CFM

1358 = CFH

1359 = ft3/day /

Standard cubic

ft. per day

1362 = gal/s

1363 = GPM

1364 = gal/hour

1365 = gal/day

1366 = Mgal/day

1367 = ImpGal/s

1368 =

ImpGal/min

1369 = ImpGal/hr

1370 = Impgal/day

1371 = bbl/s

1372 = bbl/min

1373 = bbl/hr

1374 = bbl/day

1631 = barrel (US

Beer) per

day

1632 = barrel (US

Beer) per

hour

1633 = barrel (US

Beer) per

minute

1634 =barrel (US

Beer) per

Second

253 = Special units

1048 = Gallons

1038 = Liters

1049 = Imperial

Gallons

1043 = Cubic Feet

1034 = Cubic

Meters

1051 = Barrels

1058 = Minutes

1054 = Seconds

1059 = Hours

1060 = Days

N/A R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

Any 8 characters

Any 4 characters

Any 4 characters

0.8

R/W

(OOS)

N/A

YES

YES

YES

4.8

1.6

1.0

4.8

1.6

1.0

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

N/A

N/A

N/A

150

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-2

MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)

30

31

45

46

Parameter Mnemonic

DENSITY_M_FACTOR

VOL_M_FACTOR

START_STOP_TOTALS

RESET_TOTALS

Definition

Density Factor

Volume Rate Factor

32 MASS_LOW_CUT

33 VOLUME_FLOW_LOW_

CUTOFF

34 DENSITY_LOW_CUTOF

F

35 FLOW_DIRECTION

Mass flow cutoff for internal totalizers

Volume flow cutoff for internal totalizers

Density cutoff for internal totalizers

Flow direction

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

R-283

-284

R-281-

282

R-195 —

196

R-197-

198

S

S

S

S

VARIABLE

ENUM

FLOAT (4)

Unsigned16

(2)

R-149-

150

S

R-0017 S

YES 1.0

YES 1.0

YES 0.0

YES 0.0

YES 0.2

YES 0

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

HIGH_MASS_LIMIT

HIGH_TEMP_LIMIT

HIGH_DENSITY_LIMIT

HIGH_VOLUME_LIMIT

LOW_MASS_LIMIT

LOW_TEMP_LIMIT

LOW_DENSITY_LIMIT

LOW_VOLUME_LIMIT

High mass flow limit of sensor

High Temperature limit of sensor

High density limit of sensor (g/cc)

High volume flow limit of sensor

Low mass flow limit of sensor

Low Temperature limit of sensor

Low density limit of sensor (g/cc)

Low volume flow limit of sensor

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

Totalizers

44 INTEGRATOR_FB_CON

FIG

Configuration of

Integrator Function

Block

ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

R-1511 S

R-165-

166

R-167-

168

R-169-

170

R-171-

172

R-173-

174

R-175-

176

R-177-

178

R-179-

180

YES 0

Calc

Calc

Calc

Calc

Calc

Calc

Calc

Calc

0

Start/Stop all

Totalizers

Reset all Totals

VARIABLE DS-66 (2)

VARIABLE DS-66 (2)

C — 2

C — 3 —

YES

YES

1

0

1.0

1.0

0.0

0.0

0.2

0

R

R

R

R

R

R

Enumerated List of Values

N/A R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(Any)

R

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0 = Forward Only

1 = Reverse Only

2 = Bi-Directional

3 = Absolute Value

4 =

Negate/Forward

Only

5 = Negate/Bi-Dir

N/A

R N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0

0

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

0 = Standard

1 = Internal Mass

Total

2 = Internal Vol

Total

3 = Internal Mass

Inv.

4 = Internal Vol

Inv.

5 = Int Gas Vol Tot

6 = Int Gas Vol Inv

7 = Int API Vol Tot

8 = Int API Vol Inv

9 = Int ED Std Vol

Tot

10= Int ED Std Vol

Inv

11= Int ED Net

Mass Tot

12= Int ED Net

Mass Inv

13= Int ED Net Vol

Tot

14= Int ED Net Vol

Inv

Value part of

DS-66

0 = Stop Totals

1 = Start Totals

Value part of

DS-66

1 = Reset

Configuration and Use Manual

151

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-2

MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)

48

Parameter Mnemonic

47 RESET_INVENTORIES

RESET_MASS_TOTAL

49 RESET_VOLUME_TOTA

L

55 VOLUME_TOT_INV_UNI

TS

Definition

Reset all Inventories

Reset Mass Total

Reset Volume Total

Standard or special volume total or mass inventory unit.

Message

Type

METHOD

VARIABLE

ENUM

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

Unsigned16

(2)

VARIABLE DS-66 (2)

DS-66 (2)

Unsigned16

(2)

C — 4

C — 56

C — 57

R-0046

—

—

—

50

51

52

53

MASS_TOTAL

VOLUME_TOTAL

MASS_INVENTORY

VOLUME_INVENTORY

Mass Total

Volume Total

Mass Inventory

Volume Inventory

54 MASS_TOT_INV_UNITS Standard or special mass total and mass inventory unit

VARIABLE DS-65 (5) R-0259

-0260

D/20

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

DS-65 (5)

DS-65 (5)

R-0261

-0262

R-0263

-0264

D/20

D/20

VARIABLE

ENUM

DS-65 (5) R-0265

-0266

D/20

Unsigned16

(2)

R-0045 S

S

YES

YES

YES

0

0

0

–

–

–

– g

1l

0

0

0

R

R

R

R

Enumerated List of Values

1 = Reset R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R

Value part of

DS-66

1 = Reset

Value part of

DS-66

1 = Reset

N/A

N/A

N/A

R

N/A

1088 = Kg

1089 = g

1092 = metric tons

1094 = lbs

1095 = short tons

1096 = long tons

253 = Special units

1034 = m3

1036 = cm3

1038 = l

1043 = ft3

1048 = gal

1049 = ImpGal

1051 = bbl

253 = Special units.

Gas Process Variables

56 GSV_Gas_Dens

57

58

59

60

GSV_Vol_Flow

GSV_Vol_Tot

GSV_Vol_Inv

SNS_EnableGSV

Gas Density used to calculate Reference

Volume Gas Flow and

Totals

Reference Volume

Gas Flow Rate (not valid when API or CM is enabled)

Reference Volume

Gas Total (not valid when API or CM is enabled)

Reference Volume

Gas Inventory (not valid when API or CM is enabled)

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

Enable/Disable Gas

Standard Volume Flow and Totals

ENUM

FLOAT (4)

DS-65 (5)

DS-65 (5)

DS-65 (5)

Unsigned16

(2)

R-0453

-0454

R-0455

-0456

R-0457

-0458

R-0459

-0460

C-78

S

D/20

D/20

D/20

S

YES 0.00120

5

0.0012

05

–

–

–

YES 0 0

R/W

(OOS)

N/A

R

R

R

N/A

N/A

N/A

R/W

(OOS)

0 = disabled (liquid)

1 = enabled (gas)

152

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-2

MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

Parameter Mnemonic

SNS_GSV_FlowUnits

SNS_GSV_TotalUnits

SNS_GSVflowBaseUnit

SNS_GSVflowBaseTime

SNS_GSVflowFactor

SNS_GSVflowText

SNS_GSVtotText

SNS_GSV_FlowCutoff

SNS_ResetGSVolTotal

SNS_ResetAPIGSVInv

Definition

Gas Standard Volume

Flow Engineering

Units

Gas Standard Volume

Total and Inventory

Engineering Units

Base Gas Standard

Volume Unit

Base time unit for special gas standard volume unit.

Message

Type

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

Reset Gas Standard

Volume Inventory

Method

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

R-2601

R-2602

R-2603

R-2604

S

S

S

S

Unsigned16

(2)

C-194 S

YES

YES

YES

SCFM

SCF

SCF min

1360

1058

Enumerated List of Values

R/W

(OOS)

R

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

1356 = SCFS

1359 = SCFD

1360 = SCFM

1361 = SCFH

1522 = Nm3/s

1523 = Nm3/m

1524 = Nm3/h

1525 = Nm3/d

1527 = Sm3/s

1528 = Sm3/m

1529 = Sm3/h

1530 = Sm3/d

1532 = NL/s

1533 = NL/m

1534 = NL/h

1535 = NL/d

1537 = SL/s

1538 = SL/m

1539 = SL/h

1540 = SL/d

253 = Special units.

1053 = SCF

1521 = Nm3

1526 = Sm3

1531 = NL

1536 = SL

253 = Special units

1521 = Normal cubic meter

1531 = Normal liter

1053 = Standard cubic ft

1536 = Standard liter

1526 = Standard cu meter

1058 = Minutes

1054 = Seconds

1059 = Hours

1060 = Days

N/A Special gas standard volume unit conversion factor

Special gas standard volume unit string

Special gas standard volume total and inventory unit string

Gas Standard Volume

Low Flow Cutoff

Reset Gas Standard

Volume Total

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

STRING

STRING

VISIBLE

STRING (8)

VISIBLE

STRING (8)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE DS-66 (2)

R-2605

— 2606

S

R-2607

— 2610

S

R-2611

— 2614

S

R-461-

462

C-63

S

SS

YES 1

YES

YES

YES —

NONE

NONE

YES –

YES –

1.0

NONE

NONE

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

Any 8 characters

Any 4 characters

0

0

0

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

Must be >=0.0

Value part of

DS-66

1 = Reset

1 = Reset

Configuration and Use Manual

153

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-2

MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)

71

72

73

Parameter Mnemonic

Other 4.0 additions

SNS_ResetMassInventory

SNS_ResetVolumeInventory

v7.0 Additions

SNS_ActualFlowDirection

Definition

Reset Mass Inventory

Reset Volume Inventory

Indicates whether flow is moving in the forward or reverse direction

Message

Type

Method

Method

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

VARIABLE DS-66 (2)

C-192

C-193

R422/B it #4

—

S

S

YES 0

YES 0

0

0

0

Enumerated List of Values

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

1 = Reset

1 = Reset

R Value part of

DS-66

0 = Forward or

Zero Flow

1 = Reverse Flow

0

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

24

25

26

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

Table B-3

MEASUREMENT transducer block views

OD

Index Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

ST_REV

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

XD_ERROR

Process Variables Data

MFLOW

MFLOW_UNITS

MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_BASE

MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_TIME

MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_CONV

MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_STR

TEMPERATURE

TEMPERATURE_UNITS

DENSITY

DENSITY_UNITS

VOL_FLOW

VOL_FLOW_UNITS

VOL_SPECIAL_UNIT_BASE

VOL _SPECIAL_UNIT_TIME

VOL _SPECIAL_UNIT_CONV

VOL _SPECIAL_UNIT_STR

MASS_TOT_INV_SPECIAL_ STR

VOLUME_TOT_INV_ SPECIAL_ STR

FLOW_DAMPING

View 1 View 2 View 3 View 4

2

5

5

5

4

2

1

5

2

2

2

2

2

4

2

5

5

5

4

2

1

5

2

2

1

4

8

2

2

8

8

4

8

2

2

154

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

51

52

53

54

55

47

48

49

50

44

45

46

66

67

68

69

62

63

64

65

70

71

56

57

58

59

60

61

Table B-3

MEASUREMENT transducer block views (continued)

32

33

34

35

28

29

30

31

OD

Index

27

40

41

42

43

36

37

38

39

VOLUME_TOTAL

MASS_INVENTORY

VOLUME_INVENTORY

MASS_TOT_INV_UNITS

VOLUME_TOT_INV_UNITS

Gas Process Variables

GSV_Gas_Dens

GSV_Vol_Flow

GSV_Vol_Tot

GSV_Vol_Inv

SNS_EnableGSV

SNS_GSV_FlowUnits

SNS_GSV_TotalUnits

SNS_GSVflowBaseUnit

SNS_GSVflowBaseTime

SNS_GSVflowFactor

SNS_GSVflowText

SNS_GSVtotText

SNS_GSV_FlowCutoff

SNS_ResetGSVolTotal

SNS_ResetAPIGSVInv

SNS_ResetMassInventory

Parameter Mnemonic

TEMPERATURE_DAMPING

DENSITY_DAMPING

MFLOW_M_FACTOR

DENSITY_M_FACTOR

VOL_M_FACTOR

MASS_LOW_CUT

VOLUME_LOW_CUT

DENSITY_LOW_CUT

FLOW_DIRECTION

HIGH_MASS_LIMIT

HIGH_TEMP_LIMIT

HIGH_DENSITY_LIMIT

HIGH_VOLUME_LIMIT

LOW_MASS_LIMIT

LOW_TEMP_LIMIT

LOW_DENSITY_LIMIT

LOW_VOLUME_LIMIT

Totalizers

INTEGRATOR_FB_CONFIG

START_STOP_TOTALS

RESET_TOTALS

RESET_INVENTORIES

RESET_MASS_TOTAL

RESET_VOLUME_TOTAL

MASS_TOTAL

View 1

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

2

2

2

2

2

4

4

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

View 2

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

2

2

2

2

2

View 3 View 4

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

2

4

2

2

2

2

8

8

2

Configuration and Use Manual

155

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-3

MEASUREMENT transducer block views (continued)

OD

Index

72

73

Parameter Mnemonic

SNS_ResetVolumeInventory

SNS_ActualFlowDirection

Totals

View 1

64

View 2

2

2

110

View 3 View 4

64 85

B.3

CALIBRATION transducer block parameters

Following are the parameters (Table B-4) and views (Table B-5) for the CALIBRATION transducer

block.

Table B-4

CALIBRATION transducer block parameters

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

ST_REV

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

XD_ERROR

Definition

Beginning of the transducer block

Message

Type

VARIABLE

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

DS_64 (5) N/A

The revision level of the static data associated with the function block.

Incremented with each write of static store.

The user description of the intended application of the block.

The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks.

This data is not checked or processed by the block.

The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc.

The actual, target, permitted and normal modes of the block.

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

N/A

STRING OCTET

STRING

(32)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

N/A

VARIABLE Unsigned8

(1)

RECORD DS-69 (4)

N/A

N/A

N/A

This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components associated with a block.

Used for all config,

H/W, connection failure or system problems in the block.

STRING BIT

STRING (2)

VARIABLE Unsigned8

(1)

N/A

N/A

S

S

S

N/A

0

S

S

Yes Spaces “

“

Yes 0 0

1

Enumerated List of Values

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R

N/A

N/A

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

Any 32 Characters

N/A

1 to 255 mix Yes Auto

D/20 —

11 R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R

See section 2/6 of

FF-891

See section 4.8 of

FF-903

D

Yes 0

R 18 = Process

Error

19 = Configuration

Error

20 = Electronics

Failure

21 = Sensor

Failure

8

Calibration

MASS_FLOW_GAIN Flow calibration factor VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R-407

– 408

S Yes 1.0

1.0

R/W

(OOS)

N/A

156

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-4

CALIBRATION transducer block parameters (continued)

9

Parameter Mnemonic Definition

MASS_FLOW_T_COMP Temperature coefficient for flow

10 ZERO_CAL Perform auto zero

11

12

13

14

15

16

ZERO_TIME

ZERO_STD_DEV

ZERO_OFFSET

ZERO_FAILED_VAULE

LOW_DENSITY_CAL

HIGH_DENSITY_CAL

Maximum zeroing time VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

Standard deviation of auto zero

Present flow signal offset at zero flow in

sec

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

R-0136 S

R-0231

-232

R-233-

234

S

S

Value of the zero if the zero cal failed

Perform low density calibration

Perform high-density calibration

VARIABLE

METHOD

METHOD

FLOAT (4) R-0235

-0236

C-0013 —

S

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

C-0014 —

17 FLOWING_DENSITY_C

AL

18

19

D3_DENSITY_CAL

D4_DENSITY_CAL

Perform flowing-density calibration

Perform third point calibration

Perform fourth point calibration

20 K1

21

22

23

24

25

K2

FD

K3

K4

D1

Density calibration constant 1 (msec)

Density calibration constant 2 (msec)

Flowing Density calibration constant

Density calibration constant 3 (

sec)

Density calibration constant 4 (

sec)

Density 1 (g/cc)

26 D2

27 FD_VALUE

28 D3

Density 2 (g/cc)

METHOD Unsigned16

(2)

C-0018 —

METHOD

METHOD

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

C-0044 —

C-0045 —

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

Flowing Density (g/cc) VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

Density 3 (g/cc) VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

R-159-

160

R-161-

162

R303-3

04

S

S

S

R-0503 S

R-0519 S

R-0155

-0156

R-0157

-0158

R277-2

78

S

S

S

S

29 D4 Density 4 (g/cc) VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

30 DENS_T_COEFF Density temperature coefficient

31

32

T_FLOW_TG_COEFF

T_FLOW_FQ_COEFF

T-Series: Flow TG

Coefficient (FTG)

T-Series: Flow FQ

Coefficient (FFQ)

33 T_DENSITY_TG_COEFF T-Series: Density TG

Coefficient (DTG)

34 T_DENSITY_FQ_COEFF

1

T-Series: Density FQ

Coefficient #1 (DFQ1)

35 T_DENSITY_FQ_COEFF

2

T-Series: Density FQ

Coefficient #2 (DFQ2)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

R-511

R-0163

-164

R-505

R-507

R-513

R-515

S

S

S

S

S

S

R-517 S

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE DS-66 (2)

R-409-

410

C-0005 —

S Yes

Yes

Yes

5.13

0

20

0

5.12

0

20

Enumerated List of Values

N/A R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

Value part of

DS-66

0 = Abort Zero Cal

1 = Start Zero Cal

N/A R/W

(OOS)

R N/A

R/W

(OOS)

R

N/A

N/A

0

0

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes 50000

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

0

0

0

0

0

1000

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

4.44

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(any)

0 = None

1 = Start Cal

0x0000 = None

0x0001 = Start

Cal

0 = None

1 = Start Cal

0

0

7000.

00

1100

0.0

0

0

0

0

1.0

0

0

0

4.44

0

0

0

0

0

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

0 = None

1 = Start Cal

R/W

(OOS)

0x0000 = None

0x0001 = Start

Cal

N/A R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Configuration and Use Manual

157

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-4

CALIBRATION transducer block parameters (continued)

36

37

38

39

40

Parameter Mnemonic

TEMP_LOW_CAL

TEMP_HIGH_CAL

TEMP_VALUE

TEMP_OFFSET

TEMP_SLOPE

Definition

Perform temperature calibration at the low point (point 1)

Perform temperature calibration at the high point 2)

Temperature Value for temp calibrations (in degC)

Temperature calibration offset

Temperature calibration slope

Message

Type

METHOD

METHOD

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

C-15

C — 16

R —

151-15

2

R-0413

-414

R-0411

-0412

—

—

S

S

S

Pressure Compensation

41 PRESSURE Pressure

42 PRESSURE_UNITS Pressure Unit

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

0

0

0

0.0

0

VARIABLE

ENUM

DS-65 (5)

Unsigned16

(2)

R-0451

-452

D/20

R-0044 S

0

Yes psi

43 EN_PRESSURE_COMP Enable/Disable

Pressure

Compensation

44 PRESSURE_FACTOR_

FLOW

45 PRESSURE_FACTOR_

DENS

46 PRESSURE_FLOW_CA

L

Pressure correction factor for flow

Pressure correction factor for density

Flow calibration pressure

Temperature Compensation

47 SNS_EnableExtTemp Enable/Disable

Temperature

Compensation

ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

C-0082 S

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

Method

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

Unsigned16

(2)

R-267-

268

R-269-

270

R-271-

272

S

S

S

C-0086 S

Yes 0

Yes 1

Yes 1

Yes 1

Yes 0

0

0

0

0

1.0

Enumerated List of Values

R/W

(OOS)

0 = None

1 = Start Cal

R/W

(OOS)

0 = None

1 = Start Cal

R/W

(OOS)

N/A

R /W

(OOS)

N/A

R/W

(OOS)

N/A

R/W

(any)

1141 R/W

(OOS)

0 R/W

(OOS)

N/A

1148 = inch water

@ 68F / inch [email protected]

1156 = inch HG @

0C

1154 = ft water @

68F

1151 = mm water

@ 68F

1158 = mm HG @

0C

1141 = psi

1137 = bar

1138 = millibar

1144 = g/cm2

1145 = kg/cm2

1130 = pascals

1132 = Mega pascals

1133 = kilopascals

1139 = torr @ 0C

1140 = atmospheres

1147 = Inches water @

4 degrees

Celsius

1150 = Millimeters

water @ 4

degrees

Celsius

0= disabled

1 = enabled

1

1

1

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

N/A

N/A

N/A

0 R/W

(OOS)

0= disabled

1 = enabled

158

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-4

CALIBRATION transducer block parameters (continued)

Parameter Mnemonic Definition

48 SNS_ExternalTempInput External Temperature

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

VARIABLE DS-66 (2) R421/B it #14

—

v7.0 Additions

49 SNS_ZeroInProgress VARIABLE DS-65 (5) Indicates whether a zero calibration, density calibration or temperature calibration is running.

S

0

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

24

25

26

27

28

29

Table B-5

CALIBRATION transducer block views

OD

Index Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

ST_REV

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

XD_ERROR

Calibration

MASS_FLOW_GAIN

MASS_FLOW_T_COMP

ZERO_CAL

ZERO_TIME

ZERO_STD_DEV

ZERO_OFFSET

ZERO_FAILED_VAULE

LOW_DENSITY_CAL

HIGH_DENSITY_CAL

FLOWING_DENSITY_CAL

D3_DENSITY_CAL

D4_DENSITY_CAL

K1

K2

FD

K3

K4

D1

D2

FD_VALUE

D3

D4

0

0

R/W

(Any)

Enumerated List of Values

R Value part of

DS-66

0 = Not Running

1 = Calibration

Running

View 1 View 2 View 3 View 4

2

4

2

1

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

4

4

2

4

4

4

4

2

1

2

2

1

Configuration and Use Manual

159

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

41

42

43

44

45

46

Table B-5

CALIBRATION transducer block views (continued)

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

39

40

OD

Index

30

47

48

49

Parameter Mnemonic

DENS_T_COEFF

T_FLOW_TG_COEFF

T_FLOW_FQ_COEFF

T_DENSITY_TG_COEFF

T_DENSITY_FQ_COEFF1

T_DENSITY_FQ_COEFF2

TEMP_LOW_CAL

TEMP_HIGH_CAL

TEMP_VALUE

TEMP_OFFSET

TEMP_SLOPE

Pressure Compensation

PRESSURE

PRESSURE_UNITS

EN_PRESSURE_COMP

PRESSURE_FACTOR_FLOW

PRESSURE_FACTOR_DENS

PRESSURE_FLOW_CAL

Temperature Compensation

SNS_EnableExtTemp

SNS_ExternalTempInput

v7.0 Additions

SNS_ZeroInProgress

Totals

View 1

5

5

19

2

2

102

2

4

4

2

4

4

4

4

View 2

4

View 3

4

4

5

2

34

View 4

2

4

4

4

19

B.4

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters

Table B-6

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters

0

Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

Definition

Beginning of the transducer block

1 ST_REV

2 TAG_DESC

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

VARIABLE DS_64 (5) N/A

The revision level of the static data associated with the function block.

Incremented with each write of static store.

The user description of the intended application of the block.

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

N/A

STRING OCTET

STRING

(32)

N/A

S

S

N/A

0

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R

Enumerated List of Values

N/A

N/A

S Yes Spaces »

«

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

Any 32 Characters

160

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-6

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)

8

9

3

Parameter Mnemonic

STRATEGY

4

5

6

7

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

XD_ERROR

Slug Flow Setup

SLUG_TIME

SLUG_LOW_LIMIT

10 SLUG_HIGH_LIMIT

11

Alarm Status

ALARM1_STATUS

Definition

The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks.

This data is not checked or processed by the block.

The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc.

The actual, target, permitted and normal modes of the block.

Message

Type

VARIABLE

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

Unsigned16

(2)

VARIABLE Unsigned8(

1)

RECORD DS-69 (4)

N/A

N/A

N/A

This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components associated with a block.

Used for all config,

H/W, connection failure or system problems in the block.

STRING BIT

STRING (2)

VARIABLE Unsigned8(

1)

N/A

N/A

Slug duration

(seconds)

Low Density limit

(g/cc)

High Density limit

(g/cc)

Status Word 1

S

S

Yes

Yes

0

0

0

1

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

Enumerated List of Values

N/A

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

1 to 255 mix Yes Auto

D/20 —

01 R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R

See section 2/6 of

FF-891

See section 4.8 of

FF-903

D —

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

R-0141-

142

R-201-2

02

R-199-2

00

S

S

S

Yes 0.0

Yes 0.0

Yes 5.0

ENUM BIT

STRING (2)

N/A D/20 —

R

0.0

0.0

5.0

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

N/A

N/A

N/A

18 = Process

Error

19 = Configuration

Error

20 = Electronics

Failure

21 = Sensor

Failure

R 0x0001 =

Transmitter Fail

0x0002 = Sensor

Fail

0x0004 =

EEPROM error

(CP)

0x0008 = RAM error (CP)

0x0010= Boot Fail

(CP)

0x0020 = Uncofig

– FloCal

0x0040 = Uncofig

– K1

0x0080 = Input

Overrange

0x0100 = Temp.

Overrange

0x0200 = Dens.

Overrange

0x0400 = RTI

Failure

0x0800 = Cal

Failed

0x1000= Xmitter

Init

0x2000 =

Sns/Xmitter comm fault

0x4000 = Other

Failure

0x8000 = Xmitter

Not Characterized

Configuration and Use Manual

161

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-6

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)

12

Parameter Mnemonic

ALARM2_STATUS

Definition

Status Word 2

Message

Type

ENUM

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

BIT

STRING (2)

N/A D/20 —

13 ALARM3_STATUS Status Word 3 ENUM BIT

STRING (2)

N/A D/20 —

R

R

Enumerated List of Values

0x0001 = Drive

Overrange

0x0002 = Slug

Flow

0x0004 = Cal in

Progress

0x0008 = Data

Loss Possible

0x0010 = Upgrade

Series 2000

0x0020 =

Simulation Mode

0x0040 = Meter

Verify warn

0x0080 =

Warming Up

0x0100 = Power

Reset

0x0200 = Reverse

Flow

0x0400 = AI/AO

Simulation Active

0x0800 = Not

Used

0x1000= Not

Used

0x2000 = Not

Used

0x4000 = Not

Used

0x8000 = Not

Used

0x0001 = Line

RTD Over

0x0002 = Meter

RTD Over

0x0004 = CP

Exception

0x0008 = API:

Temp OOL

0x0010=

API:Density OOL

0x0020 = ED:

Unable to fit curve data

0x0040 = ED:

Extrapolation alarm

0x0080 = Not

Used

0x0100 =

EEPROM err

(2700)

0x0200 = RAM err

(2700)

0x0400 = Factory

Config err

0x0800 = Low

Power

0x1000= Tube not full

0x2000 = Meter

Verify fault

0x4000 = Not

Used

0x8000 = Not

Used

162

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-6

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)

14

15

Parameter Mnemonic

ALARM4_STATUS

FAULT_LIMIT

Definition

Status Word 4

Fault Limit Code

Message

Type

ENUM

ENUM

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

BIT

STRING (2)

D/20

Unsigned16

(2)

R-124 S

—

5

16 LAST_MEASURED_VALUE

_FAULT_TIMEOUT

Last Measured Value

Fault Timeout

VARIABLE Unsigned16 R-314 S Yes 0 0

R

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(Any)

Enumerated List of Values

0x0001 = Cal Fail:

Low

0x0002 = Cal Fail:

High

0x0004 = Cal Fail:

Noisy

0x0008 = Auto

Zero IP

0x0010= D1 IP

0x0020 = D2 IP

0x0040 = FD IP

0x0080 = Temp slope IP

0x0100 = Temp offset IP

0x0200 = D3 IP

0x0400 = D4 IP

0x0800 = 1 —

Factory configuration invalid

0x1000= 1 —

Factory configuration

data checksum invalid

0x2000 = Core

EEPROM DB corrupt

0x4000 = Core

EEPROM Totals corrupt

0x8000 = Core

EEPROM

Program corrupt

0 = Upscale

1 = Downscale

2 = Zero

3 = NAN

4 = Flow goes to zero

5 = None

N/A

Configuration and Use Manual

163

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-6

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)

17

Parameter Mnemonic

ALARM_INDEX

Definition

Alarm Index

164

Message

Type

ENUM

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

Unsigned16

(2)

N/A S Yes 0 1 R/W

(Any)

Enumerated List of Values

19 = RAM Error

20 = Unconfig K1

21 = Incorrect

Sensor

22 = Core

EEPROM DB

Corrupt

23 = Core

EEPROM Totals

Corrupt

24 = Core

EEPROM

Promram Corrupt

25 = Boot Failed

(CP)

26 = Sns/Xmitter comm error

27 = N/A

28 = CP

Exception

29-30 = N/A

31 = Low Power

32 = Meter

Verification in

Progress

33 = Tube Stoped in process

34 = Meter

Verification Failed

35 = Meter

Verification

Aborted

0 = N/A

1 = EEPROM

Error (CP)

2 = RAM Error

(CP)

3 = Sensor Fail

4 = Temp.

Overrange

5 = Input

Overrange

6 = Xmitter Not

Characterized

7 = N/A

8 = Dens.

Overrange

9 = Xmitter Init

10 = Cal Failed

11 = Cal Failed:

Low

12 = Cal Failed:

High

13 = Cal Failed:

Noisy

14 = Transmitter

Failed

15 = N/A

16 = Line RTD

Over

17 = Meter RTD

Over

18 = EEPROM

Checksum Error

36-41 = N/A

42 = Drive

Overrange

43 = Data Loss

Possible

44 = Cal in

Progress

45 = Slug Flow

46 = N/A

47 = Power Reset

48-55 = N/A

60 = ED: Unable to fit curve data

56 = API: Temp

OOL

57 = API:Density

OOL

58-59 = N/A

72 = Simulation

Mode

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-6

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)

Parameter Mnemonic Definition

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

ALARM_SEVERITY Alarm Severity ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

R-1238 with

R-1237

= OD

17

S

Diagnostics

DRIVE_GAIN

TUBE_FREQUENCY

LIVE_ZERO

LEFT_PICKUP_VOLTAGE

RIGHT_PICKUP_VOLTAGE

Drive Gain

Raw Tube Period

Live Zero (Mass Flow)

Left Pickoff Voltage

Right Pickoff Voltage

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

DS-65 (50)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

BOARD_TEMPERATURE

ELECT_TEMP_MAX

ELECT_TEMP_MIN

ELECT_TEMP_AVG

Board Temperature

(degC)

Maximum electronics temperature

Minimum electronics temperature

Average electronics temperature

SENSOR_TEMP_MAX

SENSOR_TEMP_MIN

Maximum sensor temperature

Minimum sensor temperature

SENSOR_TEMP_AVG Average sensor temperature

RTD_RESISTANCE_CABLE 9-wire cable RTD

Resistance (ohms)

RTD_RESISTANCE_

METER

CP_POWER_CYCLE

Meter RTD Resistance

(ohms)

Number of core processor power cycles

Meter Fingerprinting

MFP_SAVE_FACTORY Save Factory Cal

Meter Fingerprint

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

R-291-2

92

R-285-2

86

R-293-2

94

R-287-2

8

R-289-2

90

R-383-3

84

R-463

D/20

D/20

D/20

D/20

D/20

D/20

D/20

R-465

R-467

R-435-4

36

R-437-4

38

R-439-4

40

R-469

R-475

R-497

C — 39

D/20

D/20

D/20

D/20

D/20

D/20

D/20

D

S

Yes 0

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Yes 0

35 MFP_RESET_STATS Yes 0

36

37

EN_MFP

MFP_UNITS

Reset Meter Current

Fingerprint Statistics

ENUM

Enable/Disable Meter

Fingerprinting

Meter Fingerprint in SI

(0) or English (1) units

ENUM

ENUM

Unsigned16

(2)

C — 40 S

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

C — 74 S

R — 625 S

Yes

Yes

1

0

2

Enumerated List of Values

61 = ED:

Extrapolation

Alarm

62-67 = N/A

68 = Factory

Config Invalid

69 = Factory

Config Checksum

Invalid

70 = N/A

71 = Meter

Verification In progress

R/W

(OOS)

0 = Ignore

1 = Info

2 = Fault

0

0

1

0

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

0x0000 = no action

0x0001 = save

0x0000 = no action

0x0001 = reset

0x0000 = disabled

0x0001 = enabled

0x0000 = SI

0x0001 = English

Configuration and Use Manual

165

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-6

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)

38

Parameter Mnemonic

MFP_TV_INDEX

Definition

Meter Fingerprint

Transmitter Variable

Index

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

N/A S Yes 0

39 MFP_TYPE

40 MFP_TV_INST

41 MFP_TV_AVG

42 MFP_TV_STD_DEV

43 MFP_TV_MAX

44 MFP_TV_MIN

45

v4.0 Additions

DIAG_FEATURE_KEY

Fingerprint Type ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

N/A S

Transmitter Variable,

Instantaneous (only valid for Current print)

Transmitter Variable,

Average (1-min rolling)

Transmitter Variable,

Std Dev (1-min rolling)

Transmitter Variable,

Maximum (since last statistics reset)

Transmitter Variable,

Minimum (since last statistics reset)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

R-629-6

30

D

R-631-6

32

R-633-6

34

R-635-6

36

D

D

D

R-637-6

38

D

Enabled Features STRING BIT

STRING (2)

R-5000 S

Yes 0

–

–

–

–

–

–

0

0

R

R

R

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

Enumerated List of Values

0 = Mass Flow

Rate

1 = Temperature

3 = Density

5 = Volume Flow

Rate

46 = Raw Tube

Frequency

47 = Drive Gain

48 = Case

Temperature

49 = LPO

Amplitude

50 = RPO

Amplitude

51 = Board

Temperature

52 = Input Voltage

54 = Live Zero

0 = Current

1 = Factory Cal

2 = Installation

3 = Last Zero

R

R

46

47

48

49

50

SYS_PowerOnTimeSec Power on time

(Seconds since last reset)

Input Voltage (Volts)

VARIABLE

UnsignedI3

2 (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

R-2625-

2626

D

SNS_InputVoltage

SNS_TargetAmplitude Actual Target

Amplitude (mV/Hz)

(Pre 700 2.1, Actual &

Override)

SNS_CaseRTDRes Case RTD Resistance

(ohms)

SYS_RestoreFactoryConfig Restore Factory

Configuration

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

R-385-3

86

R-395-3

96

D

D

VARIABLE

Method

FLOAT (4)

Unsigned16

(2)

R-473-4

74

D

C-0247 S

51 SNS_FlowZeroRestore

52 SNS_AutoZeroFactory

Restore Factory Zero

Factory flow signal offset at zero flow

(units of

Sec)

Method Unsigned16

(2)

C-243 S

VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R –

2673-26

74

S

–

–

Yes 0

Yes 0

–

–

–

R

R

R

R

0x0000 = standard

0x0010 = Meter

Verify.

0x0080 = PID

0x0800 = Enh.

Density

0x1000 = API

N/A

N/A

N/A

0

R N/A

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R

0x0000 = no action

0x0001 = Restore

0x0000 = no action

0x0001 = Restore

N/A

166

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-6

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)

53

Parameter Mnemonic

SYS_ResetPowerOnTime

54 FRF_EnableFCFValidation

Definition

Reset power-on time

Start/Stop Meter

Verification

Message

Type

Method

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

Unsigned16

(2)

C-242

Method

S

Unsigned16

(2)

R-3000 S

Yes 0

Yes 0

55

56

57

58

59

60

FRF_FaultAlarm

FRF_StiffnessLimit

FRF_AlgoState

FRF_AbortCode

FRF_StateAtAbort

FRF_Progress

61 FRF_StiffOutLimLpo

62 FRF_StiffOutLimRpo

The state of the outputs when the meter verification routine is running.

The setpoint of the stiffness limit.

Represents percentage.

The current state of the meter verification routine.

The reason the meter verification routine aborted.

ENUM

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

ENUM

Unsigned16

(2)

R –

3147-31

48

S

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

R-3001 S

Unsigned16

(2)

R-3093

R-3002

S

S

Yes 0

Yes 0

–

–

The state of the meter verification routine when it aborted.

Progress (%

Complete)

Is the LPO Stiffness out of limits?

Is the RPO Stiffness out of limits?

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

R-3003

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

R —

3004

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

R —

3005

S

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

R-3020 S

S

S

–

–

–

–

0

0

0

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(Any)

Enumerated List of Values

0x0000 = no action

0x0001 = Reset

0 = Disabled

1 = Full Meter

Verification

(including current calibrations)

2 =Factory Air

Verification

3 =Factory Water

Verification

4 =Special debug mode

5 =Abort

6 =Background

Meter Verification

(no current cal)

7 = Single Point

Baseline (takes the place of factory air and factory water)

0=Last Value

0.04

R/W

(Any)

R

R

R

R

R

R

N/A

N/A

N/A

1 through 18

0=No error

1=Manual Abort

2=Watchdog

Timeout

3=Frequency Drift

4=High Peak

Drive Voltage

5=High Drive

Current Standard

Deviation

6=High Drive

Current Mean

Value

7=Drive loop reported error

8=High Delta T

Standard

Deviation

9=High Delta T

Value

10=State Running

1 through 18

Configuration and Use Manual

167

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-6

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)

63

64

65

66

67

68

Parameter Mnemonic

FRF_StiffnessLpo_mean

FRF_StiffnessRpo_mean

FRF_Damping_meanR –

3109-3110 with 3100=0

FRF_MassLpo_mean

FRF_MassRpo_mean

FRF_StiffnessLpo_stddev

69 FRF_StiffnessRpo_stddev

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

FRF_Damping_stddev

FRF_MassLpo_stddev

FRF_MassRpo_stddev

FRF_StiffnessLpo_air

FRF_StiffnessRpo_air

FRF_Damping_air

FRF_MassLpo_air

FRF_MassRpo_air

Definition

The current LPO stiffness calculated as a mean

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

The current RPO stiffness calculated as a mean

The current damping calculated as a mean

The current LPO mass calculated as a mean

The current RPO mass calculated as a mean

The current LPO stiffness calculated as a standard deviation

The current RPO stiffness calculated as a standard deviation

The current damping calculated as a standard deviation

The current LPO mass calculated as a standard deviation

The current RPO mass calculated as a standard deviation

The LPO stiffness calculated as a mean during Factory Cal of

Air

The RPO stiffness calculated as a mean during Factory Cal of

Air

The damping calculated as a mean during Factory Cal of

Air

The LPO mass calculated as a mean during Factory Cal of

Air

The RPO mass calculated as a mean during Factory Cal of

Air

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

R –

3105-31

06 with

3100=2

R –

3107-31

08 with

3100=2

R –

3109-31

10 with

3100=2

R –

3107-31

08 with

3100=1

R –

3109-31

10 with

3100=1

R –

3101 –

3102 with

3100=2

R –

3103-31

04 with

3100=2

R –

3109-31

10 with

3100=0

R –

3101 –

3102 with

3100=1

R –

3103-31

04 with

3100=1

R –

3105-31

06 with

3100=1

R –

3101 –

3102 with

3100=0

R –

3103-31

04 with

3100=0

R –

3105-31

06 with

3100=0

R –

3107-31

08 with

3100=0

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

168

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

R

Enumerated List of Values

N/A

R N/A

R N/A

R N/A

R N/A

R N/A

R N/A

R N/A

R N/A

R N/A

R N/A

R N/A

R N/A

R N/A

R N/A

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-6

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)

78

Parameter Mnemonic

FRF_StiffnessLpo_water

79 FRF_StiffnessRpo_water

80

81

82

83

FRF_Damping_water

FRF_MassLpo_water

FRF_MassRpo_water

ALERT_TIMEOUT

84

v5.0 Additions

FRF_FCFValidCounter

Definition

The LPO stiffness calculated as a mean during Factory Cal of

Water

The RPO stiffness calculated as a mean during Factory Cal of

Water

The damping calculated as a mean during Factory Cal of

Water

The LPO mass calculated as a mean during Factory Cal of

Water

The RPO mass calculated as a mean during Factory Cal of

Water

Alert Timeout

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

R –

3101 –

3102 with

3100=3

R –

3103-31

04 with

3100=3

R –

3105-31

06 with

3100=3

R –

3107-31

08 with

3100=3

VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R –

3109-31

10 with

3100=3

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

R —

1512

S

S

S

S

S

S

–

–

–

–

–

Yes 0

0 Counts the number of times the Meter

Verification algorithm has run successfully.

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

R-3017 S

85

V6.0 Additions

FRF_StartMeterVer 0 Start On-Line Meter

Verification (Equivalent to Reg 3000=6)

VARIABLE DS-66 (2) Coil 190 S

86

87

88

89

90

FRF_MV_Index

FRF_MV_Counter

FRF_MV_Status

FRF_MV_Time

FRF_MV_LPO_Norm

FCF Datalog Index

(0-19, 0 = most recent run)

FCF Datalog Item 1:

Run Number

FCF Datalog Item 2:

Status (Bit7 = FCF pass/fail, Bits6-4 = state, Bits3-0 = Abort code) Abort States are compressed to fit in 3 bits

FCF Datalog Item 3:

Time Initiated

FCF Datalog Item 4:

LPO Normalized Data

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

2984

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

2985

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

2986

VARIABLE Unsigned32

(4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

2987-29

88

2989-29

90

S

S

S

S

S

—

—

—

—

0

R

R

R

R

R

0 R/W

(Any)

0 to 300 sec

R N./A

RW

(Any)

RW

(Any)

Value part of

DS-66

0 = no action

1 = Start Meter

Verification in continue measurement mode

N/A

R N/A

R N/A

R

R

Enumerated List of Values

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

91

92

FRF_MV_RPO_Norm

FRF_DriveCurr

FCF Datalog Item 5:

RPO Normalized Data

Drive Current

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

2991-29

92

3113-31

14

S

S —

R N/A

RW

(Any)

N/A

Configuration and Use Manual

169

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-6

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

Parameter Mnemonic

FRF_DL_T

Definition

Delta T

FRF_Temp Temperature

FRF_Density Density

FRF_DriveFreq

FRF_LpoFilt

FRF_RpoFilt

FRF_DataSetSelIndex

Drive Frequency

LPO Filter

RPO Filter

FCF Verification Data

Set Selection

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3115-31

16

VARIABLE 3117-31

18

VARIABLE 3119-31

20

VARIABLE FLOAT (4) 3121-31

22

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

3123-31

24

3125-31

26

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigne d16 (2)

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

V7.0 Changes — Moved from Calibration TB

100 FRF_MV_FirstRun_Time FCF Timers: Time

Until First Run in

Hours ( Applicable only if Meter

Verification Feature is

Enabled)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

101 FRF_MV_Elapse_Time FCF Time VARIABLE FLOAT (4) between each run after the first run initiated in hours (

Applicable only if

Meter Verification is

Enabled)

102 FRF_MV_Time_Left FCF FLOAT (4)

Until Next Run in

Hours

103 FRF_ToneLevel VARIABLE FLOAT (4) Frf Tone Level (mA)

(Applicable only if

Meter Verification is

Enabled)

104 FRF_DriveFreq

105

106

107

FRF_BlCoeff

FRF_DriveTarget

FRF_DrivePCoeff

Tone Ramp Time

(Seconds) (Applicable only if Meter

Verification is enabled)

BL Coef. ( Applicable only if Meter

Verification feature is enabled)

FRF Drive Target

(Applicable only if

Meter Verification

Feature is Enabled)

FRF Drive P

Coefficient (Applicable only if Meter

Verification Feature is

Enabled)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

2993-29

94

S

2995-29

96

2997-29

98

3083-30

84

3085-30

86

3087-30

88

3089-30

90

3091-30

92

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

170

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

R N/A

RW

(OOS)

N/A

RW

(OOS)

N/A

RW

(OOS)

N/A

RW

(OOS)

N/A

RW

(OOS)

N/A

Enumerated List of Values

N/A RW

(Any)

R N/A

RW

(OOS)

RW

(OOS)

RW

(OOS)

RW

(OOS)

RW

(Any)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0=Current Data

Means

1=Current Data

Std Deviations

2=Factory Cal of

Air Means

3=Factory Cal of

Water Means

4=Running average data

5=Standard Error of the Estimate

RW

(Any)

N/A

RW

(Any)

N/A

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-6

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)

108

109

110

111

Parameter Mnemonic

FRF_ToneSpacingMult

FRF_Freq_DriftLimit

FRF_Max_Current_mA

FRF_KFQ2

Definition

Tone Spacing

Multiplier (Applicable only if Meter

Verification Feature is

Enabled)

Frequency Drift Limit

(Applicable only if

Meter Verification

Feature is Enabled)

Max Sensor Current

(Applicable only if

Meter Verification

Feature is Enabled

KFQ2 Linear Density

Correction for Stiffness

Value

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

3159-31

60

3161-31

62

S

S

3163-31

64

S

3165-31

66

S

v7.0 Additions

112 SYS_AnalogOutput_Fault Indicates whether there is a critical fault present

VARIABLE DS-66 (2) —

113 SNS_MV_Failed Indicates whether

Meter Verification

Failed

VARIABLE DS-66 (2) R433/Bi t #14

—

—

—

—

0

0

0

RW

(OOS)

Enumerated List of Values

N/A

RW

(OOS)

N/A

RW

(OOS)

N/A

RW

(Any)

N/A

R

R

Value part of

DS-66

0 = No Critical

Fault

1 = Critical Fault

Present

Value part of

DS-66

0 = Meter

Verification did not

Fail

1 = Meter

Verification Failed

0

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

Table B-7

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block views

OD

Index

11

12

13

14

8

9

10

Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

ST_REV

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

XD_ERROR

Slug Flow Setup

SLUG_TIME

SLUG_LOW_LIMIT

SLUG_HIGH_LIMIT

Alarm Status

ALARM1_STATUS

ALARM2_STATUS

ALARM3_STATUS

ALARM4_STATUS

View 1

2

2

2

2

2

4

2

1

View 2

2

View 3 View 4

2

4

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

4

4

4

2

1

View 4_1 View 4_2

2 2

Configuration and Use Manual

171

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

172

31

32

33

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

38

39

40

41

34

35

36

37

42

43

44

53

54

55

56

57

58

49

50

51

52

45

46

47

48

Table B-7

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block views (continued)

16

17

18

OD

Index

15

MFP_TV_INDEX

MFP_TYPE

MFP_TV_INST

MFP_TV_AVG

MFP_TV_STD_DEV

MFP_TV_MAX

MFP_TV_MIN

v4.0 Additions

DIAG_FEATURE_KEY

SYS_PowerOnTimeSec

SNS_InputVoltage

SNS_TargetAmplitude

SNS_CaseRTDRes

SYS_RestoreFactoryConfig

SNS_FlowZeroRestore

SNS_AutoZeroFactory

SYS_ResetPowerOnTime

FRF_EnableFCFValidation

FRF_FaultAlarm

FRF_StiffnessLimit

FRF_AlgoState

FRF_AbortCode

Parameter Mnemonic

FAULT_LIMIT_CODE

LAST_MEASURED_VALUE_FAULT_TIMEOUT

ALARM_INDEX

ALARM_SEVERITY

Diagnostics

DRIVE_GAIN

TUBE_FREQUENCY

LIVE_ZERO

LEFT_PICKOFF_VOLTAGE

RIGHT_PICKOFF_VOLTAGE

BOARD_TEMPERATURE

ELECT_TEMP_MAX

ELECT_TEMP_MIN

ELECT_TEMP_AVG

SENSOR_TEMP_MAX

SENSOR_TEMP_MIN

SENSOR_TEMP_AVG

RTD_RESISTANCE_CABLE

RTD_RESISTANCE_METER

CP_POWER_CYCLE

Meter Fingerprinting

MFP_SAVE_FACTORY

MFP_RESET_STATS

EN_MFP

MFP_UNITS

View 1

5

2

4

2

2

2

2

View 2

2

2

View 3 View 4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

5

4

2

2

2

4

2

2

2

2

2

2

View 4_1 View 4_2

2

2

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

FRF_FCFValidCounter

FRF_StartMeterVer

FRF_MV_Index

FRF_MV_Counter

FRF_MV_Status

FRF_MV_Time

FRF_MV_LPO_Norm

FRF_MV_RPO_Norm

FRF_DriveCurr

FRF_DL_T

FRF_Temp

FRF_Density

FRF_DriveFreq

FRF_LpoFilt

FRF_RpoFilt

FRF_DataSetSelIndex

FRF_MV_FirstRun_Time

FRF_MV_Elapse_Time

FRF_MV_Time_Left

FRF_Density

FRF_ToneRampTime

FRF_BlCoeff

Parameter Mnemonic

FRF_StateAtAbort

FRF_Progress

FRF_StiffOutLimLpo

FRF_StiffOutLimRpo

FRF_StiffnessLpo_mean

FRF_StiffnessRpo_mean

FRF_Damping_mean

FRF_MassLpo_mean

FRF_MassRpo_mean

FRF_StiffnessLpo_stddev

FRF_StiffnessRpo_stddev

FRF_Damping_stddev

FRF_MassLpo_stddev

FRF_MassRpo_stddev

FRF_StiffnessLpo_air

FRF_StiffnessRpo_air

FRF_Damping_air

FRF_MassLpo_air

FRF_MassRpo_air

FRF_StiffnessLpo_water

FRF_StiffnessRpo_water

FRF_Damping_water

FRF_MassLpo_water

FRF_MassRpo_water

ALERT_TIMEOUT

Table B-7

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block views (continued)

96

97

98

99

92

93

94

95

88

89

90

91

84

85

86

87

100

101

102

103

104

105

80

81

82

83

76

77

78

79

72

73

74

75

68

69

70

71

64

65

66

67

60

61

62

63

OD

Index

59

View 1 View 2

2

View 3 View 4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

4

2

2

View 4_1 View 4_2

2

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

4

2

2

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

Configuration and Use Manual

173

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-7

DIAGNOSTICS transducer block views (continued)

OD

Index

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

Parameter Mnemonic

FRF_DriveTarget

FRF_DrivePCoeff

FRF_ToneSpacingMult

FRF_Freq_DriftLimit

FRF_Max_Current_mA

FRF_KFQ2

SYS_AnalogOutput_Fault

SNS_MV_Failed

Totals

View 1

22

View 2

2

2

26

View 3 View 4

112 39

View 4_1 View 4_2

4

4

4

4

4

4

96 100

B.5

DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters

Table B-8

DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters

0

Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

1

2

3

4

5

6

ST_REV

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

Definition

Beginning of the transducer block

Message

Type

VARIABLE

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

DS_64 (5) N/A

The revision level of the static data associated with the function block.

Incremented with each write of static store.

The user description of the intended application of the block.

The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks.

This data is not checked or processed by the block.

The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc.

The actual, target, permitted and normal modes of the block.

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

N/A

STRING OCTET

STRING

(32)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

N/A

VARIABLE Unsigned8

(1)

RECORD DS-69 (4)

N/A

N/A

N/A

This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components associated with a block.

STRING BIT

STRING (2)

N/A

S

S

S

S

S

D/20

Yes

Yes

Yes

—

N/A

0

Spaces

0

0 mix Yes Auto

Enumerated List of Values

»

«

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

0 R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

Any 32 Characters

N/A

1

01

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R

N/A

N/A

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R

1 to 255

See section 2/6 of

FF-891

See section 4.8 of

FF-903

174

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-8

DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters (continued)

7

16

17

Parameter Mnemonic

XD_ERROR

SENSOR_TYPE_CODE

SENSOR_MATERIAL

Definition

Used for all config,

H/W, connection failure or system problems in the block.

Sensor type code

Sensor Material

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

VARIABLE Unsigned8

(1)

N/A D

8

9

Transmitter Data

SERIAL_NUMBER

OPTION_BOARD_CODE

Serial number of this device

Code of the Output

Option Board

VARIABLE Unsigned32

(4)

ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

R-48-4

9

R-113

8

S

S

10

11

12

13

14

15

18

700_SW_REV

2700_SW_REV

CEQ_NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

Sensor Data

SENSOR_SN

SENSOR_TYPE

SENSOR_LINER

Model 700 Transmitter software revision

Model 2700

Transmitter software revision

Model 2700

Transmitter CEQ

Number

User Text

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

R-113

7

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

R-120

0

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

R-500

5

STRING OCTET

STRING

(16)

R-96-1

03

S

S

S

S

Sensor serial number

Sensor type (i.e. F200,

CMF025)

VARIABLE Unsigned32

(4)

STRING VISIBLE

STRING

(16)

R-012

7-128

R-042

5

S

S

Liner Material

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

Unsigned16

(2)

R-113

9

Unsigned16

(2)

R-013

0

S

S

Unsigned16

(2)

R-013

1

S

R

Enumerated List of Values

18 = Process

Error

19 = Configuration

Error

20 = Electronics

Failure

21 = Sensor

Failure

Yes 0

20

0

S/W

Rev

S/W

Rev

S/W

Rev

R

Yes “CONFI

GURE

XMTR”

“CON

FIGU

RE

XMT

R”

R / W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R

0

R

0 = None

2 = Foundation

Fieldbus (LC302 board)

20 = Foundation

Fieldbus (Hornet board)

N/A

R N/A

N/A

Yes 0 0

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@

@”

“@

@

@

@

@

@

@

Yes 0

“@@@

@@@

@@@

@@@

@@@

@”

0

Yes 253 253

Yes 253

R/W

(Any)

R

0

253

R/W

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

0 = Curve Tube

1 = Straight Tube

3 = Hastelloy

C-22

4 = Monel

5 = Tantalum

6 = Titanium

19 = 316L stainless steel

23 = Inconel

252 = Unknown

253 = Special

10 = PTFE

(teflon)

11 = Halar

16 = Tefzel

251 = None

252 = Unknown

253 = Special

Configuration and Use Manual

175

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-8

DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters (continued)

19

Parameter Mnemonic

SENSOR_END

Definition

Flange Type

Message

Type

ENUM

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

Unsigned16

(2)

R-012

9

S Yes 253

20

21

22

MASS_MIN_RANGE

TEMP_MIN_RANGE

HIGH_DENSITY_LIMIT

Mass flow minimum range

Temperature minimum range

High density limit of sensor (g/cc)

23 VOLUME_MIN_RANGE Volume flow minimum range

24 SNS_PuckDeviceTypeCode Device Type for the attached Core

Processor

25 AI_SIMULATE_MODE AI Simulate Mode

26

27

SNS_HartDeviceID

SYS_DeviceType

Core Processor

Unique ID

Transmitter Device

Type

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE FLOAT

ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

R-181-

182

R-183-

184

R-187-

188

R-116

2

S

S

S

S

S

ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

C-84 S

VARIABLE Unsigned32

(4)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

R-118

7-1188

S

R-120 S

Yes 0

0

43

Calc

Calc

Calc

—

Calc

253

0

R

R

R/W

(Any)

R

Enumerated List of Values

0 = ANSI 150

1 = ANSI 300

2 = ANSI 600

5 = PN 40

7 = JIS 10K

8 = JIS 20K

9 = ANSI 900

10 = Sanitary

Clamp Fitting

11 = Union

12 = PN 100

251 = None

252 = Unknown

253 = Special

N/A

R/W

R

N/A

N/A

N/A

40 = 700 (CP)

50 = 800 (ECP)

R/W

(Any)

R

0 = disabled

1 = enabled

N/A

R N/A

176

5

6

3

4

0

1

2

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Table B-9

DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block views

OD

Index

14

Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

ST_REV

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

XD_ERROR

Transmitter Data

SERIAL_NUMBER

OPTION_BOARD_CODE

700_SW_REV

2700_SW_REV

CEQ_NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

Sensor Data

SENSOR_SN

View 1

2

4

2

1

View 2 View 3

2

4

2

2

2

4

2

4

2

1

View 4

2

2

1

2

16

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-9

DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block views (continued)

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

24

25

26

27

OD

Index

15

Parameter Mnemonic

SENSOR_TYPE

SENSOR_TYPE_CODE

SENSOR_MATERIAL

SENSOR_LINER

SENSOR_END

MASS_MIN_RANGE

TEMP_MIN_RANGE

DENSITY_MIN_RANGE

VOLUME_MIN_RANGE

SNS_PuckDeviceTypeCode

AI_SIMULATE_MODE

SNS_HartDeviceID

SYS_DeviceType

Totals

View 1

9

View 2

16

View 3

9

4

2

2

2

73

4

4

4

4

2

2

2

2

View 4

16

B.6

LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters

Following are the parameters (Table B-10) and views (Table B-11) for the LOCAL DISPLAY

transducer block.

Table B-10

LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters

1 ST_REV

2 TAG_DESC

3 STRATEGY

4 ALERT_KEY

5 MODE_BLK

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

0

Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

Definition

Beginning of the transducer block

VARIABLE DS_64 (5) N/A

The revision level of the static data associated with the function block.

Incremented with each write of static store.

The user description of the intended application of the block.

The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks.

This data is not checked or processed by the block.

The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc.

The actual, target, permitted and normal modes of the block.

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

STRING OCTET

STRING

(32)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

N/A

VARIABLE Unsigned8

(1)

RECORD DS-69 (4)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

S

S mix

N/A

0

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R

Enumerated List of Values

N/A

N/A

S

S

Yes Spaces »

«

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

Yes 0 0 R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

Any 32 Characters

N/A

S Yes 0 1 R/W 1 to 255

Auto 01 R/W See section 2/6 of

FF-891

Configuration and Use Manual

177

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-10

LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters (continued)

6

Parameter Mnemonic

BLOCK_ERR

7 XD_ERROR

Definition

This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components associated with a block.

Used for all config,

H/W, connection failure of system problems in the block.

Message

Type

STRING

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

BIT

STRING (2)

VARIABLE Unsigned8

(1)

N/A

N/A

D/20 R

Enumerated List of Values

See section 4.8 of

FF-903

D R 18 = Process

Error

19 = Configuration

Error

20 = Electronics

Failure

21 = Sensor

Failure

8

9

LDO

EN_LDO_TOT_RESET

EN_LDO_TOT_START_STO

P

Enable/Disable LDO

Totalizer Reset

Enable/Disable LDO

Totalizer Start/Stop option

Enable/Disable LDO

Auto Scroll Feature

ENUM

ENUM

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

C-0094

C-0091

S

S

10 EN_LDO_AUTO_SCROLL ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

C-0095 S

C-0096 S 11 EN_LDO_OFFLINE_MENU Enable/Disable LDO

Offline Menu Feature

12 EN_LDO_OFFLINE_PWD Enable/Disable LDO

Offline Password

13 EN_LDO_ALARM_MENU Enable/Disable LDO

Alarm Menu

14 EN_LDO_ACK_ALL_ALARMS Enable/Disable LDO

Acknowledge All alarms feature

15 LDO_OFFLINE_PWD LDO offline password

16

17

18

LDO_SCROLL_RATE

LDO_BACKLIGHT_ON

UI_Language Display language selection

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

LDO Scroll rate

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

LDO Backlight Control ENUM

ENUM

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

C-0097 S

S

S

S

S

S

S

19 LDO_VAR_1_CODE Display the Variable associated with the code on the LDO

ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

S

Yes 0

Yes 1

Yes 0

Yes 1

Yes 1

Yes

Yes

0

0

Yes 1234

Yes 1

Yes 1

Yes 0

Yes 0

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

R/W

(Any)

R/W

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

(Any)

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

0x0000 = disabled

0x0001 = enabled

0x0000 = disabled

0x0001 = enabled

0x0000 = disabled

0x0001 = enabled

1234 R/W

(Any)

1 R/W

(Any)

1

0

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

0 R/W

(Any)

—

0 — 9999

0 = off

1 = on

0 = English

1 = German

2 = French

3 = Reserved

4 = Spanish

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

DE

178

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-10

LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters (continued)

Parameter Mnemonic

20 LDO_VAR_2_CODE

Definition

Display the Variable associated with the code on the LDO

Message

Type

ENUM

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

Unsigned16

(2)

21 LDO_VAR_3_CODE

22 LDO_VAR_4_CODE

Display the Variable associated with the code on the LDO

Display the Variable associated with the code on the LDO

ENUM

ENUM

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

Configuration and Use Manual

S Yes 2

S Yes 5

S Yes 6

5

6

2 R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

Enumerated List of Values

Inventory

26 = ED: Net Mass

Flow

27 = ED: Net Mass

Total

28 = ED: Net Mass

Inv

29 = ED: Net Vol

Flow Rate

30 = ED: Net Vol

Total

31 = ED: Net Vol

Inventory

32 = ED:

Concentration

33 = API: CTL

46 = Raw Tube

Frequency

47 = Drive Gain

48 = Case

Temperature

49 = LPO

Amplitude

50 = RPO

Amplitude

51 = Board

Temperature

52 = NA

53 = Ext. Input

Pressure

54 = NA

55 = Ext. Input

0 = Mass Flow

Rate

1 = Temperature

2 = Mass Total

3 = Density

4 = Mass Inventory

5 = Volume Flow

Rate

6 = Volume Total

7 = Volume

Inventory

15 = API: Corr

Density

16 = API: Corr Vol

Flow

17 = API: Corr Vol

Total

18 = API: Corr Vol

Inv

19 = API: Avg

Density

20 = API: Avg

Temp

21 = ED: Density

At Ref

22 = ED: Density (

SGU)

23 = ED: Std Vol

Flow Rate

24 = ED: Std Vo

Total

25 = ED: Std Vol

Temp

56 = ED: Density

(Baume)

62 = Gas Std Vol

Flow

63 = Gas Std Vol

Total

64 = Gat Std Vol

Inventory

69 = Live Zero

251 = None

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

DE

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

DE

179

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-10

LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters (continued)

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

Parameter Mnemonic

LDO_VAR_5_CODE

LDO_VAR_6_CODE

LDO_VAR_7_CODE

LDO_VAR_8_CODE

LDO_VAR_9_CODE

LDO_VAR_10_CODE

LDO_VAR_11_CODE

LDO_VAR_12_CODE

LDO_VAR_13_CODE

LDO_VAR_14_CODE

LDO_VAR_15_CODE

FBUS_UI_ProcVarIndex

Definition

Message

Type

Display the Variable associated with the code on the LDO

Display the Variable associated with the code on the LDO

Display the Variable associated with the code on the LDO

Display the Variable associated with the code on the LDO

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

Display the Variable associated with the code on the LDO

Display the Variable associated with the

Display the Variable associated with the

Display the Variable associated with the

Display the Variable associated with the

Display the Variable associated with the

Display the Variable associated with the code on the LDO

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

Process Variable Code ENUM

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

Unsigned16

Unsigned16

Unsigned16

(2)

35 UI_NumDecimals The number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point for the process variable selected with index 34

36 UI_UpdatePeriodmsec

37 UI_EnableStatusLedBlinking Enable/Disable

Display Status LED

Blinking

38 UI_EnableAlarmPassword

The period in milliseconds in which the display is updated

Enable/Disable

Display Alarm Screen

Password

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

ENUM

ENUM

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

0

3

4

1

2

5

Table B-11

LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block views

OD

Index Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

ST_REV

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

180

S Yes 3

S Yes 1

S Yes 251

S Yes 251

S Yes 251

S

S

S

S

S

S

Yes 251

Yes 251

Yes 251

Yes 251

Yes 251

Yes 251

S Yes 0

S Yes 4

3

1

251

251

251

251

251

251

251

251

251

0

4

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

Enumerated List of Values

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

DE

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

DE

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

DE

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

DE

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

DE

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

DE

Same as

LDO_VAR_2_CO

DE

0 to 5

S Yes 200

S

S

Yes

Yes

1

0

200 R/W

(Any)

100 to 10000

1

0

R/W

(Any)

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

R/W

(Any)

0 = Disable

1 = Enable

View 1 View 2 View 3 View 4

2 2 2 2

2

1

4 4

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

33

34

35

36

29

30

31

32

37

38

25

26

27

28

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

8

9

10

11

12

Table B-11

LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block views (continued)

6

7

OD

Index Parameter Mnemonic

BLOCK_ERR

XD_ERROR

LDO

EN_LDO_TOT_RESET

EN_LDO_TOT_START_STOP

EN_LDO_AUTO_SCROLL

EN_LDO_OFFLINE_MENU

EN_LDO_OFFLINE_PWD

EN_LDO_ALARM_MENU

EN_LDO_ACK_ALL_ALARMS

LDO_OFFLINE_PWD

LDO_SCROLL_RATE

LDO_BACKLIGHT_ON

UI_Language

LDO_VAR_1_CODE

LDO_VAR_2_CODE

LDO_VAR_3_CODE

LDO_VAR_4_CODE

LDO_VAR_5_CODE

LDO_VAR_6_CODE

LDO_VAR_7_CODE

LDO_VAR_8_CODE

LDO_VAR_9_CODE

LDO_VAR_10_CODE

LDO_VAR_11_CODE

LDO_VAR_12_CODE

LDO_VAR_13_CODE

LDO_VAR_14_CODE

LDO_VAR_15_CODE

FBUS_UI_ProcVarIndex

UI_NumDecimals

UI_UpdatePeriodmsec

UI_EnableStatusLedBlinking

UI_EnableAlarmPassword

Totals

View 1

2

1

9

2

4

View 2 View 3

2

1

9

View 4

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

65

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Configuration and Use Manual

181

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

B.7

API transducer block parameters

Following are the parameters (Table B-12) and views (Table B-13) for the API transducer block.

Table B-12

API transducer block parameters

8

9

0

Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

Definition

Beginning of the transducer block

1 ST_REV

2

3

4

5

6

7

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

XD_ERROR

Message

Type

VARIABLE

Data Type/

Structure

DS_64 (5) N/A

The revision level of the static data associated with the function block.

Incremented with each write of static store.

The user description of the intended application of the block.

The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks.

This data is not checked or processed by the block.

The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc.

The actual, target, permitted and normal modes of the block.

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

N/A

STRING OCTET

STRING

(32)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

N/A

VARIABLE Unsigned8

(1)

RECORD DS-69 (4)

N/A

N/A

N/A

This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components associated with a block.

Used for all config,

H/W, connection failure or system problems in the block.

STRING BIT

STRING (2)

VARIABLE Unsigned8

(1)

N/A

N/A

S

S

D

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R

Enumerated List of Values

N/A

N/A

S

S

Yes

Yes

Spaces »

«

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

0 0 R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

Any 32 Characters

N/A

S Yes 0 1 R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

1 to 255 mix Yes Auto

D/20 —

01 R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R

See section 2/6 of

FF-891

See section 4.8 of

FF-903

—

N/A

0

R

API Process Variables

API_Corr_Density

API_Corr_Vol_Flow

10 API_Ave_Corr_Density

11 API_Ave_Corr_Temp

12 API_CTL

13 API_Corr_Vol_Total

Temp Corrected

Density

Temp Corrected

(Standard) Volume

Flow

Batch Weighted

Average Density

Batch Weighted

Average Temperature

CTL

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

Temp Corrected

(Standard) Volume

Total

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

R-0325

-326

R-0331

-332

D/20

D/20

R-0337

-338

R-339-

340

R-0329

-330

R-0333

-0334

D/20

D/20

D/20

D/20

–

–

–

–

–

–

R

R

R

R

R

R

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

18 = Process

Error

19 = Configuration

Error

20 = Electronics

Failure

21 = Sensor

Failure

N/A

N/A

182

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-12

API transducer block parameters (continued)

Parameter Mnemonic

14 API_Corr_Vol_Inv

15 API_Reset_Vol_Total

Definition

Temp Corrected

(Standard) Volume

Inventory

Reset API Reference

Volume Total

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

R-0335

-336

D/20

C-0058 —

–

Yes

(1)

–

R

Enumerated List of Values

N/A

0 R/W

(Any)

Value part of

DS-66

0 = No effect

1 = Reset

16

17

18

19

20

21

API Setup Data

EN_API

API_Ref_Temp

API_TEC

API_Table_Type

API_FEATURE_KEY

Enable/Disable API

API Reference Temp

API Thermal

Expansion Coeff

API 2540 CTL Table

Type

Enabled Features

SNS_ResetAPIGSVInv Reset

Inventory

ENUM

STRING

Method

Unsigned16

(2)

BIT

STRING (2)

C-72 S

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

ENUM

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

Unsigned16

(2)

R-0319

-0320

R-0323

-0324

S

S

R-0351 S

S

Unsigned16

(2)

C-0194 S

Yes 0

Yes

(1)

15

Yes

(1)

0.001

Yes

(1)

81

Yes

(1)

—

0

0 R/W

(OOS)

15.0

R/W

(OOS)

0.001

R/W

(OOS)

81 R/W

(OOS)

0

R

R/W

(Any)

0 = disabled

1 = enabled

17 = Table 5A

18= Table 5B

19= Table 5D

36= Table 6C

49= Table 23A

50= Table 23B

51= Table 23D

68= Table 24C

81 = Table 53A

82 = Table 53B

83 = Table 53D

100 = Table 54C

0x0000 = standard

0x0800 = Meter

Verifi.

0x0080 = PID (Not

Applicable)

0x0008 = Enh.

Density

0x0010 = API

0 = No effect

1 = Reset

Configuration and Use Manual

183

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-12

API transducer block parameters (continued)

Parameter Mnemonic

22 API_TEMPERATURE_U

NITS

Definition

Temperature Unit

23 API_DENSITY_UNITS Density Unit

Message

Type

ENUM

Data Type/

Structure

Unsigned16

(2)

R-0041 S

ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

R-0040 S

24 API_VOL_FLOW_UNITS Standard or special volume flow rate unit

ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

R-0042 S

C

 g/cm

3

1/s

R

R

R

Enumerated List of Values

1000 = K

1001 = Deg C

1002 = Deg F

1003 = Deg R

1097 = kg/m3

1100 = g/cm3

1103 = kg/L

1104 = g/ml

1105 = g/L

1106 = lb/in3

1107 = lb/ft3

1108 = lb/gal

1109 = Ston/yd3

1113 = DegAPI

1114 = SGU

1347 = m3/s

1348 = m 3/min

1349 = m3/hr

1350 = m3/day

1351 = L/s

1352 = L/min

1353 = L/hr

1355 = Ml/day

1356 = CFS

1357 = CFM

1358 = CFH

1359 = ft3/day /

Standard cubic

ft. per day

1362 = gal/s

1363 = GPM

1364 = gal/hour

1365 = gal/day

1366 = Mgal/day

1367 = ImpGal/s

1368 =

ImpGal/min

1369 = ImpGal/hr

1370 = Impgal/day

1371 = bbl/s

1372 = bbl/min

1373 = bbl/hr

1374 = bbl/day

1631 = barrel (US

Beer) per

day

1632 = barrel (US

Beer) per

hour

1633 = barrel (US

Beer) per

minute

1634 =barrel (US

Beer) per

Second

253 = Special units

(1) Writable only if the API feature is enabled.

184

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

11

12

13

14

8

9

10

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

Table B-13

API transducer block views

OD

Index Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

ST_REV

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

XD_ERROR

View 1

2

4

2

1

View 2

2

API Process Variables

API_Corr_Density

API_Corr_Vol_Flow

API_Ave_Corr_Density

API_Ave_Corr_Temp

API_CTL

API_Corr_Vol_Total

API_Corr_Vol_Inv

API_TEMPERATURE_UNITS

API_DENSITY_UNITS

API_VOL_FLOW_UNITS

Totals

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

API_Reset_Vol_Total

API Setup Data

EN_API

API_Ref_Temp

2

API_TEC

API_Table_Type

API_FEATURE_KEY

SNS_ResetAPIGSVInv 2

44

2

2

2

12

View 3

2

44

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

4

2

1

View 4

4

2

2

2

4

2

2

1

19

Configuration and Use Manual

185

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

B.8

CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters

Table B-14

CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters

0

Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

Definition

Beginning of the transducer block

1 ST_REV

2

3

4

5

6

7

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

XD_ERROR

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

VARIABLE DS_64 (5) N/A

The revision level of the static data associated with the function block.

Incremented with each write of static store.

The user description of the intended application of the block.

The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks.

This data is not checked or processed by the block.

The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc.

The actual, target, permitted and normal modes of the block.

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

N/A

STRING OCTET

STRING

(32)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

N/A

VARIABLE Unsigned8

(1)

RECORD DS-69 (4)

N/A

N/A

N/A

This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components associated with a block.

Used for all config,

H/W, connection failure or system problems in the block.

STRING BIT

STRING (2)

VARIABLE Unsigned8

(1)

N/A

8

9

CM Process Variables

CM_Ref_Dens

CM_Spec_Grav

10 CM_Std_Vol_Flow

11 CM_Net_Mass_Flow

12 CM_Net_Vol_Flow

13 CM_Conc

14 CM_Baume

CM Totals

15 CM_Std_Vol_Total

16 CM_Std_Vol_Inv

Density At Reference

Density (Fixed SG

Units)

Standard Volume Flow

Rate

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

Net Mass Flow Rate VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

Net Volume Flow Rate VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

Concentration VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

Density (Fixed Baume

Units)

Standard Volume Total

Standard Volume

Inventory

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

DS-65 (5)

DS-65 (5)

DS-65 (5)

DS-65 (5)

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

S

S

D

R-963

R-965

D/20

D/20

R-967 D/20

R-973

R-979

R-985

R-987

D/20

D/20

D/20

D/20

R-969

R-971

D/20

D/20

—

N/A

0

Enumerated List of

Values

S

S

Yes

Yes

Spaces

0

»

«

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

0 R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

Any 32 Characters

N/A

S Yes 0 1 mix

D/20

Yes

—

Auto 01

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

1 to 255

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R

See section 2/6 of

FF-891

See section 4.8 of

FF-903

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

R/W

(OOS or

Auto)

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

N/A

N/A

18 = Process Error

19 = Configuration

Error

20 = Electronics

Failure

21 = Sensor Failure

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

186

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-14

CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)

Parameter Mnemonic

17 CM_Net_Mass_Total

18 CM_Net_Mass_Inv

19 CM_Net_Vol_Total

20 CM_Net_Vol_Inv

21 CM_Reset_Std_Vol_Total

22 CM_Reset_Net_Mass_Tot al

23 CM_Reset_Net_Vol_Total

Definition

Net Mass Total

Net Mass Inventory

Net Volume Total

Net Volume Inventory

Reset CM Standard

Volume Total

Reset CM Net Mass

Total

Reset CM Net Volume

Total

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

VARIABLE DS-65 (5)

VARIABLE DS-66 (2)

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

DS-66 (2)

DS-66 (2)

R-975

R-977

R-981

R-983

C-59

C-60

C-61

CM Setup Data

24 EN_CM ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

25

26

CM_Curve_Lock

CM_Mode

Enable/Disable

Concentration

Measurement

Lock Concentration

Measurement Tables

Concentration

Measurement Mode

ENUM

ENUM

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

C-85

R-524

—

S

S

S

—

—

D/20

D/20

D/20

D/20

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

–

–

–

–

0

0

27 CM_Active_Curve Active Calculation

Curve

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

R-523

28

29

30

31

CM_Curve_Index

CM_Temp_Index

CM_Conc_Index

CM_Temp_ISO

Curve Configuration

Index (n)

Curve n

Temperature

Isotherm Index (x-axis)

Curve n

Concentration

Index (y-axis)

Curve n

(6×5)

Temperature Isotherm

Value (x-axis) x

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R-531

32 CM_Dens_At_Temp_ISO

33 CM_Dens_At_Temp_Coeff Curve n

(6×5) Coeff @

Temperature

Isotherm

X

,

Concentration

Y

34 CM_Conc_Label_55

Curve n

(6×5) Density

@ Temperature

Isotherm

X

,

Concentration

Y

Curve n

(6×5)

Concentration

Y

Value

(Label for y-axis)

35 CM_Dens_At_Conc Curve n

(5×1) Density at Concentration

Y

(at

Ref Temp)

36 CM_Dens_At_Conc_Coeff Curve n

(5×1) Coeff at

Concentration

Y

Temp)

(at Ref

37 CM_Conc_Label_51 Curve n

(5×1)

Concentration

Y

(y-axis)

Value

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

FLOAT (4)

R-533

R-535

R-537

R-539

R-541

R-543

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0.0

0.0

R

R

R

R

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

Enumerated List of

Values

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Value part of DS-66

1 = Reset

Value part of DS-66

1 = Reset

Value part of DS-66

1 = Reset

R/W

(OOS)

0x0000 = disabled

0x0001 = enabled

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

0x0000 = not locked

0x0001 = locked

0 = None

1= Dens @ Ref Temp

2= Specific Gravity

3= Mass Conc (Dens)

4=Mass Conc (SG)

5= Volume Conc

(Dens)

6= Volume Conc (SG)

7= Concentration

(Dens)

8 = Concentration

(SG)

0 through 5

0 through 5

0 through 5

0 through 5

R/W

(OOS)

0.0

R/W

(OOS)

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(OOS)

Configuration and Use Manual

187

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-14

CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)

38

45

46

Parameter Mnemonic

CM_Ref_Temp

Definition

Curve n

Reference

Temperature

39 CM_SG_Water_Ref_Temp Curve n

SG Water

Reference

Temperature

40 CM_SG_Water_Ref_Dens Curve n

SG Water

Reference Density

41 CM_Slope_Trim

42 CM_Slope_Offset

43 CM_Extrap_Alarm_Limit

44 CM_Curve_Name

47

48

49

CM_Max_Fit_Order

CM_Fit_Results

CM_Conc_Unit_Code

CM_Expected_Acc

CM_FEATURE_KEY

Curve n

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R-545 S

VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R-547 S

VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R-549 S

VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R-551 S

Curve n

Offset Trim VARIABLE FLOAT (4) R-553 S

Curve n

Extrapolation

Alarm Limit: %

Curve n

ASCII String –

Name of Curve – 12 chars supported

Maximum Fit Order for

5×5 curve

VARIABLE FLOAT (4)

VARIABLE VISIBLE

STRING

(12)

VARIABLE Unsigned16

(2)

R-555

R-557-5

62

R-564

S

S

S

Curve n

Curve Fit

Results

ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

R-569 S

Curve n

Concentration

Units Code

Curve n

Slope Trim

Curve Fit

Expected Accuracy

Enabled Features

ENUM

VARIABLE

STRING

Unsigned16

(2)

R-570 S

FLOAT(4)

BIT

STRING (2)

R-571 S

R-5000 S

Enumerated List of

Values

Yes

(1)

0 0.0

R/W

(OOS)

Yes

(1)

0 4.0

R/W

(OOS)

Yes

(1)

0 1.0

R/W

(OOS)

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

3

1.0

Yes

(1)

Yes

(1)

Yes

(1)

0

5

0.0

5.0

“””Empty

Curve”

“Empty

Curve”

R/W

(OOS)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

3

R/W

(OOS)

Shall accept > 0.8

Yes

(1)

0

1343

0

1343

R/W

(OOS)

R

R/W

(OOS)

2, 3, 4, 5 (Shall accept only enum values)

0 = Good

1 = Poor

2 = Failed

3 = Empty

1110 = Degrees

Twaddell

1426= Degrees Brix

1111= Deg Baume

(heavy)

1112= Deg Baume

(light)

1343=% sol/wt

1344=% sol/vol

1427= Degrees

Balling

1428= Proof Per

Volume

1429 = Proof Per mass

1346 = Percent Plato

R

R 0x0000 = standard

0x0800 = Meter

Verifi.

0x0080 = PID (Not

Applicable)

0x0008 = Enh.

Density

0x0010 = API

50

v4.0 Additions

SNS_ResetCMVolInv

51 SNS_ResetCMNetMassIn v

52 SNS_ResetCMNetVolInv

53 SNS_CM_ResetFlag

Reset CM Volume

Inventory

Reset CM Net Mass

Inventory

Reset CM Net Volume

Inventory

Reset All

Concentration

Measurement Curve

Information

Method

Method

Method

Method

Unsigned16

(2)

C-0195 S

Unsigned16

(2)

C-0196 S

Unsigned16

(2)

Unsigned16

(2)

C-0197 S

C-249 S

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

0

0

0

0

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(OOS)

0 = No effect

1 = Reset

0 = No effect

1 = Reset

0 = No effect

1 = Reset

1 = Reset

188

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-14

CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)

Parameter Mnemonic

54 SNS_CM_EnableDensLow

Extrap

55 SNS_CM_EnableDensHig hExtrap

56 SNS_CM_EnableTempLo wExtrap

57 SNS_CM_EnableTempHig hExtrap

Definition

Enable Low Density

Extrapolation Alarm

Enable High Density

Extrapolation Alarm

Enable Low

Temperature

Extrapolation Alarm

Enable High

Temperature

Extrapolation Alarm

Message

Type

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

v6.0 Additions

58 CM_TEMPERATURE_

UNITS

Temperature Unit ENUM

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

Unsigned16

(2)

C-250

Unsigned16

(2)

C-251

Unsigned16

(2)

C-252

Unsigned16

(2)

C-253

S

S

S

S

Unsigned16

(2)

R-0041 S

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

Yes

(1)

0

C°

59 CM_DENSITY_UNITS Density Unit ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

R-0040 S g/cm

3

1

1

1

1

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

R/W

(Any)

Enumerated List of

Values

1 = Enable

1 = Enable

1 = Enable

R/W

(Any)

1 = Enable

60 CM_VOL_FLOW_UNITS Standard or special volume flow rate unit

ENUM Unsigned16

(2)

R- 0042 S l/s

R

R

R

1000 = K

1001 = Deg C

1002 = Deg F

1003 = Deg R

1097 = kg/m3

1100 = g/cm3

1103 = kg/L

1104 = g/ml

1105 = g/L

1106 = lb/in3

1107 = lb/ft3

1108 = lb/gal

1109 = Ston/yd3

1113 = DegAPI

1114 = SGU

1347 = m3/s

1348 = m 3/min

1349 = m3/hr

1350 = m3/day

1351 = L/s

1352 = L/min

1353 = L/hr

1355 = Ml/day

1356 = CFS

1357 = CFM

1358 = CFH

1359 = ft3/day /

Standard cubic ft. per day

1362 = gal/s

1363 = GPM

1364 = gal/hour

1365 = gal/day

1366 = Mgal/day

1367 = ImpGal/s

1368 = ImpGal/min

1369 = ImpGal/hr

1370 = Impgal/day

1371 = bbl/s

1372 = bbl/min

1373 = bbl/hr

1374 = bbl/day

1631 = barrel (US

Beer) per day

1632 = barrel (US

Beer) per hour

1633 = barrel (US

Beer) per minute

Configuration and Use Manual

189

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

Table B-14

CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)

Parameter Mnemonic Definition

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

(size in bytes)

v7.0 Additions

61 CM_Increment_Curve Increment the Active

Curve to the next one.

VARIABLE DS-66 (2) —

(1) Writable only if the API feature is enabled.

0

Enumerated List of

Values

1634 =barrel (US

Beer) per Second

253 = Special units

R/W

(Any)

Value part of DS-66

0 = None

1 = Increment

190

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

4

5

2

3

0

1

6

7

Table B-15

CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block views

OD

Index View 1

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

24

25

26

Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

ST_REV

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

XD_ERROR

CM Process Variables

CM_Ref_Dens

CM_Spec_Grav

CM_Std_Vol_Flow

CM_Net_Mass_Flow

CM_Net_Vol_Flow

CM_Conc

CM_Baume

CM Totals

CM_Std_Vol_Total

CM_Std_Vol_Inv

CM_Net_Mass_Total

CM_Net_Mass_Inv

CM_Net_Vol_Total

CM_Net_Vol_Inv

CM_Reset_Std_Vol_Total

CM_Reset_Net_Mass_Total

CM_Reset_Net_Vol_Total

CM Setup Data

EN_CM

CM_CURVE_LOCK

CM_Mode

2

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

4

2

1

View 2

2

2

2

2

View 3

2

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

4

2

1

5

5

5

5

5

5

View 4

2

2

2

2

2

1

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

Table B-15

CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block views (continued)

58

59

60

44

45

46

47

48

49

40

41

42

43

36

37

38

39

32

33

34

35

28

29

30

31

OD

Index

27

61

Parameter Mnemonic

CM_Active_Curve

CM_Curve_Index

CM_Temp_Index

CM_Conc_Index

CM_Temp_ISO

CM_Dens_At_Temp_ISO

CM_Dens_At_Temp_Coeff

CM_Conc_Label_55

CM_Dens_At_Conc

CM_Dens_At_Conc_Coeff

CM_Conc_Label_51

CM_Ref_Temp

CM_SG_Water_Ref_Temp

CM_SG_Water_Ref_Dens

CM_Slope_Trim

CM_Slope_Offset

CM_Extrap_Alarm_Limit

CM_Curve_Name

CM_Max_Fit_Order

CM_Fit_Results

CM_Conc_Unit_Code

CM_Expected_Acc

CM_FEATURE_KEY

v4.0 Additions

SNS_ResetCMVolInv

SNS_ResetCMNetMassInv

SNS_ResetCMNetVolInv

SNS_CM_ResetFlag

SNS_CM_EnableDensLowExtrap

SNS_CM_EnableDensHighExtrap

SNS_CM_EnableTempLowExtrap

SNS_CM_EnableTempHighExtrap

v6.0 Additions

CM_TEMPERATURE_UNITS

CM_DENSITY_UNITS

CM_VOL_FLOW_UNITS

v6.0 Additions

CM_Increment_Curve

Totals

View 1

74

View 2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

26

View 3

2

76

4

2

2

2

2

2

4

4

4

4

2

4

2

2

View 4

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

12

2

99

Configuration and Use Manual

191

Model 2700 transducer blocks reference

192

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Appendix C

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

C.1

Resource block parameters

Table C-1

Resource block parameters

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Parameter Mnemonic

Standard FF Parameters

BLOCK_STRUCTURE

ST_REV

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

Definition

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure Size

Beginning of the resource block

VARIABLE DS_64 5

The revision level of the static data associated with the function block.

Incremented with each write of static store.

VARIABLE Unsigned16 2

The user description of the intended application of the block.

STRING OCTET

STRING

32

The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks. This data is not checked or processed by the block.

The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc.

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

The actual, target, permitted and normal modes of the block.

RECORD

This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or software components associated with a block.

STRING

Unsigned16

Unsigned8

DS-69

BIT STRING

2

1

4

2

S

S

S

S

S mix

D/20 —

N/A R/W

0 R

Spac es

R/W

0

0

R/W

R/W

Auto R/W

R

RS_STATE

TEST_RW

DD_RESOURCE

Contains the operational state of the Function Block

Application.

VARIABLE Unsigned8

Read/write test parameter

— used only for conformance testing.

RECORD

String identifying the tag of the resource which contains the Device

Description for this resource.

STRING

DS-85

OCTET

STRING

1

112

32

D/20

D/20

S

—

0

Spac es

R

R

R

Enumerated List of

Values

N/A

N/A

Any 32 Characters

N/A

0 to 255

See section 2.6 of FF-891 1.0

bit 0 = Other bit 1 = Block Config Error bit 3 = Simulate Active bit 6 = Maintenance Soon bit 7 = Input Failure bit 8 = Output Failure bit 9 = Memory Failure bit 11 = Lost NV Data bit 13 = Maintenance Now bit 15 = Out of Service

0 = Invalid State

1 = Start/Restart

2 = Initialization

3 = On-Line Linking

4 = On-Line

5 = Standby

6 = Failure

1.0

1.0

1.0

Any 32 Characters

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

Configuration and Use Manual

193

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

Table C-1

Resource block parameters continued

10

Parameter Mnemonic

MANUFAC_ID

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

DEV_TYPE

DEV_REV

DD_REV

(1)

(1)

GRANT_DENY

HARD_TYPES

RESTART

FEATURES

Definition

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure Size

Manufacturer identification number — used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource.

ENUM

Manufacturer’s model number associated with the resource — used by interface devices to locate the DD file for the resource.

ENUM

Unsigned32

Unsigned16

Manufacturer revision number associated with the resource — used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource.

VARIABLE Unsigned8

Revision of the DD associated with the resource — used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource.

VARIABLE

Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block.

RECORD

Unsigned8

DS-70

The types of hardware available as channel numbers.

ENUM

Allows a manual restart to be initiated. Several degrees of restart are possible.

ENUM

Used to show supported resource block options.

ENUM

Bit String

Unsigned8

Bit String

4

2

1

1

2

2

1

2

S

S

S

S

S

S

D

S

18

19

20

21

22

FEATURE_SEL

CYCLE_TYPE

CYCLE_SEL

MIN_CYCLE_T

MEMORY_SIZE

Used to select resource block options.

Identifies the block execution methods available for this resource.

Used to select the block execution method for this resource.

ENUM

ENUM

ENUM

Bit String

Bit String

Bit String

2

2

2

Time duration of the shortest cycle interval of which the resource is capable. Measured in 1/32 millisecond.

VARIABLE Unsigned32 4

Available configuration memory in the empty resource in Kbytes. To be checked before attempting a download.

VARIABLE Unsigned16 2

S

S

S

S

S

0x00

0310

R

0x20

00

R

4

1

0.0

R/W

0x80 R

8

R

R

R

Enumerated List of

Values

0x000310 = Micro Motion

0x2000 = 2700

0x80 = SCALAR_INPUT

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1 R/W

|

0x10

0x20

|

0x40

|

0x80

R

0x10 R/W

1 = Run

2 = Restart resource

3 = Restart with defaults

4 = Restart processor

0x0010 = SoftWriteLock

0x0020 = FailSafe

0x0040 = Report

0x0080 = Unicode

1.0

1.0

0x80

|

0x40

0

8000

R

RW

R

0x0010 = SoftWriteLock

0x0020 = FailSafe

0x0040 = Report

0x0080 = Unicode

0x0080 = CycleScheduled

0x0040 = BlockComplete

1.0

1.0

0x0080 = CycleScheduled

0x0040 = BlockComplete

1.0

1.0

1.0

194

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

Table C-1

Resource block parameters continued

23

Parameter Mnemonic

NV_CYCLE_T

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

FREE_SPACE

FREE_TIME

SHED_RCAS

SHED_ROUT

FAULT_STATE

SET_FSTATE

CLR_FSTATE

MAX_NOTIFY

LIM_NOTIFY

CONFIRM_TIME

WRITE_LOCK

Definition

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure Size

Minimum time interval in

1/32 millisec specified by the manufacturer for writing copies of NV parameters to non-volatile memory. Zero means it will never be automatically copied. At the end of

NV_CYCLE_TIME, only those parameters which have changed (as defined by the manufacturer) need to be updated in NVRAM

VARIABLE Unsigned32 4

VARIABLE Float 4 Percent of memory available for further configuration. Zero in a preconfigured resource.

Percent of the block processing time that is free to process additional blocks.

VARIABLE Float 4

Time duration in 1/32 millisec at which to give up on computer writes to function block RCas locations. Shed from

RCas shall never happen when SHED_RCAS = 0.

VARIABLE Unsigned32 4

Time duration in 1/32 millisec at which to give up on computer writes to function block ROut locations. Shed from Rout shall never happen when

SHED_ROUT = 0.

VARIABLE Unsigned32 4

Unsigned8 1 Condition set by loss of communication to an output block, fault promoted to an output block or a physical contact. When Fault State condition is set, Then output function blocks will perform their FSTATE actions.

ENUM

Allows the Fault State condition to be manually initiated by selecting Set.

Writing a Clear to this parameter will clear the device fault state if the field condition, if any, has cleared.

ENUM

ENUM

Unsigned8

Unsigned8

1

1

Maximum number of unconfirmed notify messages possible.

Maximum number of unconfirmed alert notify messages allowed.

VARIABLE

VARIABLE

Unsigned8

Unsigned8

1

1

The time in 1/32 millisec the resource will wait for confirmation of receipt of a report before trying again.

Retry shall not happen when

CONFIRM_TIME = 0.

VARIABLE Unsigned32 4

If locked, no writes from anywhere are allowed, except to clear

WRITE_LOCK. Block inputs will continue to be updated.

ENUM Unsigned8 1

S

D

D

S

S

N

D

D

S

S

S

S

—

—

31,68

0,000

R

6400

00

R/W

6400

00

R/W

1

1

1

5

5

6400

00

R/W

1

R

R

R

R/W

R/W

R

R/W

R/W

Enumerated List of

Values

0-100 Percent

0-100 Percent

1 = Clear

2 = Active

1 = Off

2 = Set

1 = Off

2 = Set

0 to MAX_NOTIFY

1 = Unlocked

2 = Locked

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

Configuration and Use Manual

195

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

Table C-1

Resource block parameters continued

35

Parameter Mnemonic

UPDATE_EVT

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

BLOCK_ALM

ALARM_SUM

ACK_OPTION

WRITE_PRI

WRITE_ALM

ITK_VER

FD_VER

Definition

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure Size

This alert is generated by any change to the static data.

RECORD

The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the

Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed.

RECORD

The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported states, and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block.

RECORD

Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged.

ENUM

DS-73

DS-72

DS-74

Bit String

1/4

13

8

2

Priority of the alarm generated by clearing the write lock.

VARIABLE

This alert is generated if the write lock parameter is cleared.

RECORD

Unsigned8

DS-72

1

1/3

Major revision number of the interoperability test case used in certifying this device as interoperable.

The format and range of the version number is defined and controlled by the Fieldbus Foundation.

Note: The value of this parameter will be zero (o) if the device has not been registered as interoperable by the FF.

VARIABLE Unsigned16 2

A parameter equal to the value of the major version of the Field Diagnostics specification that this device was designed to.

Unsigned16 2

D

D mix

S

S

D

S

S

—

—

—

—

—

0

0

5

R

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R

RO

Enumerated List of

Values

0 = Auto Ack Disabled

1 = Auto Ack Enabled

0 to 15

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

3.0

7.0

196

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

Table C-1

Resource block parameters continued

43

Parameter Mnemonic

FD_FAIL_ACTIVE

Definition

This parameter reflects the error conditions that are being detected as active as selected for this category. It is a bit string, so that multiple conditions may be shown.

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

Bit String

Size

4 D

44

45

46

FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE This parameter reflects the error conditions that are being detected as active as selected for this category. It is a bit string, so that multiple conditions may be shown.

FD_MAINT_ACTIVE This parameter reflects the error conditions that are being detected as active as selected for this category. It is a bit string, so that multiple conditions may be shown.

FD_CHECK_ACTIVE This parameter reflects the error conditions that are being detected as active as selected for this category. It is a bit string, so that multiple conditions may be shown.

Bit String

Bit String

Bit String

4

4

4

D —

D

D —

—

RO

RO

Enumerated List of

Values

0x00000001 = Check

Function

0x00000002 = Calibration in Progress

0x00000008 = Sensor

Simulation Active

0x00000010 = Slug Flow

0x00000020 = Meter

Verification Aborted

0x00000040 = Meter

Verification Failed

0x00000080 =

Extrapolation Alert

0x00000100 = PM:

Temperature or Density

Overrange

0x00000200 = Drive

Overrange

0x00000400 = Data Loss

Possible (Totals)

0x00001000 = Calibration

Failure

0x00002000 = Transmitter

Not Characterized

0x00004000 = CM:

Unable to Fit Curve Data

0x00008000 =

Temperature Overrange

0x00010000 = No Left

Pickoff/Right Pickoff

Signal

0x00020000 = Density

Overrange

0x00040000 = Mass Flow

Overrange

0x00080000 = No Sensor

Response

0x00100000 = Low Power

0x00200000 = Sensor

Communication Failure

0x00400000 = NV

Memory Failure

0x00800000 = Transmitter

Initializing/Warming Up

0x01000000 = Electronics

Failure — Hornet

0x02000000 = Electronics

Failure — Device

0x04000000 = Factory configuration invalid

0x08000000 = Factory configuration checksum invalid

7.0

Same as OD Index 43 7.0

RO

RO

Same as OD Index 43

Same as OD Index 43

7.0

7.0

Configuration and Use Manual

197

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

Table C-1

Resource block parameters continued

47

Parameter Mnemonic

FD_FAIL_MAP

48

49

50

51

52

53

FD_OFFSPEC_MAP

FD_MAINT_MAP

FD_CHECK_MAP

FD_FAIL_MASK

FD_OFFSPEC_MASK

FD_MAINT_MASK

Definition

This parameter maps conditions to be detected as active for this alarm category. Thus the same condition may be active in all, some, or none of the 4 alarm categories.

This parameter maps conditions to be detected as active for this alarm category. Thus the same condition may be active in all, some, or none of the 4 alarm categories.

This parameter maps conditions to be detected as active for this alarm category. Thus the same condition may be active in all, some, or none of the 4 alarm categories.

This parameter maps conditions to be detected as active for this alarm category. Thus the same condition may be active in all, some, or none of the 4 alarm categories.

This parameter allows the user to suppress any single or multiple conditions that are active, in this category, from being broadcast to the host through the alarm parameter. A bit equal to

‘1’ will mask i.e. inhibit the broadcast of a condition, and a bit equal to ‘0’ will unmask i.e. allow broadcast of a condition.

This parameter allows the user to suppress any single or multiple conditions that are active, in this category, from being broadcast to the host through the alarm parameter. A bit equal to

‘1’ will mask i.e. inhibit the broadcast of a condition, and a bit equal to ‘0’ will unmask i.e. allow broadcast of a condition.

This parameter allows the user to suppress any single or multiple conditions that are active, in this category, from being broadcast to the host through the alarm parameter. A bit equal to

‘1’ will mask i.e. inhibit the broadcast of a condition, and a bit equal to ‘0’ will unmask i.e. allow broadcast of a condition.

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

Bit String

Bit String

Bit String

Bit String

Bit String

Bit String

Bit String

Size

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

Enumerated List of

Values

Same as OD Index 43 7.0

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

Same as OD Index 43 7.0

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

Same as OD Index 43 7.0

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

Same as OD Index 43 7.0

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

Same as OD Index 43 7.0

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

Same as OD Index 43 7.0

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

Same as OD Index 43 7.0

198

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

Table C-1

Resource block parameters continued

54

Parameter Mnemonic

FD_CHECK_MASK

55 FD_FAIL_ALM

56 FD_OFFSPEC_ALM

57 FD_MAINT_ALM

58 FD_CHECK_ALM

59 FD_FAIL_PRI

60 FD_OFFSPEC_PRI

61 FD_MAINT_PRI

62 FD_CHECK_PRI

63 FD_SIMULATE

Definition

This parameter allows the user to suppress any single or multiple conditions that are active, in this category, from being broadcast to the host through the alarm parameter. A bit equal to

‘1’ will mask i.e. inhibit the broadcast of a condition, and a bit equal to ‘0’ will unmask i.e. allow broadcast of a condition.

This parameter is used primarily to broadcast a change in the associated active conditions, which are not masked, for this alarm category to a Host

System

.

Message

Type

This parameter is used primarily to broadcast a change in the associated active conditions, which are not masked, for this alarm category to a Host

System.

This parameter is used primarily to broadcast a change in the associated active conditions, which are not masked, for this alarm category to a Host

System.

This parameter is used primarily to broadcast a change in the associated active conditions, which are not masked, for this alarm category to a Host

System.

This parameter allows the user to specify the priority of this alarm category.

This parameter allows the user to specify the priority of this alarm category.

This parameter allows the user to specify the priority of this alarm category.

This parameter allows the user to specify the priority of this alarm category.

This parameter allows the conditions to be manually supplied when simulation is enabled. When simulation is disabled both the diagnostic simulate value and the diagnostic value track the actual conditions. The simulate jumper is required for simulation to be enabled and while simulation is enabled the recommended action will show that simulation is active.

Data Type/

Structure

Bit String

Size

4

DS-87

DS-87

DS-87

DS-87

Unsigned8

Unsigned8

Unsigned8

Unsigned8

DS-89

15

15

15

15

1

1

1

1

9

S

D

D

D

D

S

S

S

S

D

—

—

—

—

—

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

Enumerated List of

Values

Same as OD Index 43

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

0 RW

(OS/

AUTO)

0

0

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

0 RW

(OS/

AUTO) disab led

RW

(OS/

AUTO)

7.0

7.0

7.0

7.0

7.0

7.0

7.0

7.0

7.0

7.0

Configuration and Use Manual

199

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

Table C-1

Resource block parameters continued

64

65

66

67

68

Parameter Mnemonic Definition

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure Size

FD_RECOMMEN_ACT This parameter is a device enumerated summarization of the most severe condition or conditions detected. The

DD help should describe by enumerated action, what should be done to alleviate the condition or conditions. 0 is defined as

Not Initialized, 1 is defined as No Action Required, all others defined by manuf.

FD_EXTENDED_ACTIVE An optional parameter or parameters to allow the user finer detail on conditions causing an active condition in the

FD_*_ACTIVE parameters.

FD_EXTENDED_MAP An optional parameter or parameters to allow the user finer control on enabling conditions contributing to the conditions in

FD_*_ACTIVE parameters.

Unsigned16

Bit String

Bit String

EPM Parameters

COMPATIBILITY_REV This parameter is used when replacing field devices. The correct value of this parameter is the

DEV_REV value of the replaced device.

HARDWARE_REVISION Hardware revision of that hardware unsigned8

VARIABLE unsigned8

2

4

4

4

1

D

D

S

D

S

69 SOFTWARE_REV

70 PD_TAG

Software revision of source code which has resource block in it.

PD tag description of device

Visible

String

Visible

String

32

32

S

S

71

72

DEV_STRING

DEV_OPTIONS

73 OUTPUT_BOARD_SN

74 FINAL_ASSY_NUM

75

76

DOWNLOAD_MODE

HEALTH_INDEX

This is used to load new licensing into the device.

The value can be written but will always read back with a value of 0.

Indicates which miscellaneous device licensing options are enabled.

Output board serial number.

The same final assembly number placed on the neck label.

Gives access to the boot block code for over the wire downloads

VARIABLE Array of unsigned32

ENUM bit string

VARIABLE unsigned32 4

VARIABLE unsigned32 4 unsigned8

32

4

1

Parameter representing the overall health of the device, 100 being perfect.

VARIABLE Unsigned8 1

S

S

S

S

S

D —

—

—

0 RO

RO

RW

R

Set on

Build

Set on

Build

R

R

Copy of

MIB

PD_

TAG

R

0 R/W

0

0

0

R/W

R

R/W

R

R

Enumerated List of

Values

Same as OD Index 77

Same as OD Index 43

Same as OD Index 43

0x00000001 = Download

1 — 100

7.0

7.0

7.0

7.0

7.0

7.0

7.0

1.0

7.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

3.0

200

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

Table C-1

Resource block parameters continued

77

78

Parameter Mnemonic

FAILED_PRI

RECOMMENDED_ACTI

ON

Definition

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure Size

Designates the alarming priority of the

FAILED_ALM and also used as switch b/w FD and legacy PWA. If value is greater than or equal to

1 then PWA alerts will be active in device else device will have FD alerts.

Enumerated list of recommended actions displayed with a device alert.

VARIABLE unsigned8

VARIABLE unsigned16

1

2

S

D —

0 R/W

Enumerated List of

Values

0 — 15

R 0 = Uninitialized

1 = No action

6 = Factory configuration checksum invalid

7 = Factory configuration invalid

8 = Electronics Failure —

Device

9 = Replace the Fieldbus

Electronics Module

Assembly

10 = Transmitter

Initializing/Warming Up

11 = Reset the Device then Download the Device

Configuration

12 = Sensor

Communication Failure

13 = Low Power

14 = No Sensor Response

15 = Mass Flow

Overrange

16 = Density Overrange

17 = No Left Pickoff/Right

Pickoff Signal

18 = Temperature

Overrange

19 = CM: Unable to Fit

Curve Data

20 = Transmitter Not

Characterized

21 = Calibration Failure

23 = Data Loss Possible

(Totals)

24 = Drive Overrange

25 = PM: Temperature or

Density Overrange

26 = Extrapolation Alert

27 = Meter Verification

Failed

28 = Meter Verification

Aborted

29 = Slug Flow

30 = Sensor Simulation

Active

32 = Allow the procedure to complete

33 = Check Transducer

Block Mode

34 = Simulation Active

39 = Simulated — Factory configuration checksum invalid

40 = Simulated — Factory configuration invalid

41 = Simulated —

Electronics Failure —

Device

42 = Simulated — Replace the Fieldbus Electronics

Module Assembly

43 = Simulated —

Transmitter

Initializing/Warming Up

44 = Simulated — Reset the Device then Download the Device Configuration

45 = Simulated — Sensor

Communication Failure

46 = Simulated — Low

Power

47 = Simulated — No

Sensor Response

3.0

Configuration and Use Manual

201

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

Table C-1

Resource block parameters continued

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

Parameter Mnemonic

FAILED_ALM

MAINT _ALM

ADVISE _ALM

FAILED_ENABLE

FAILED_MASK

FAILED_ACTIVE

MAINT_PRI

Definition

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure Size

R/W

Enumerated List of

Values

48 = Simulated — Mass

Flow Overrange

49 = Simulated — Density

Overrange+

50 = Simulated — No Left

Pickoff/Right Pickoff

Signal

51 = Simulated —

Temperature Overrange

52 = Simulated — CM:

Unable to Fit Curve Data

53 = Simulated —

Transmitter Not

Characterized

54 = Simulated —

Calibration Failure

56 = Simulated — Data

Loss Possible (Totals)

57 = Simulated — Drive

Overrange

58 = Simulated — PM:

Temperature or Density

Overrange

59 = Simulated —

Extrapolation Alert

60 = Simulated — Meter

Verification Failed

61 = Simulated — Meter

Verification Aborted

62 = Simulated — Slug

Flow

63 = Simulated — Sensor

Simulation Active

65 = Simulated — Allow the procedure to complete

66 = Simulated — Check

Transducer Block Mode

3.0

3.0

Alarm indicating a failure within a device which makes the device non-operational.

RECORD DS-71

Alarm indicating the device needs maintenance soon. If the condition is ignored, the device will eventually fail.

Alarm indicating advisory alarms. These conditions do not have a direct impact on the process or device integrity.

RECORD

RECORD

Enabled FAILED_ALM alarm conditions.

Corresponds bit for bit to the FAILED_ACTIVE.A bit on means that the corresponding alarm condition is enabled and will be detected. A bit off means the corresponding alarm condition is disabled and will not be detected.

ENUM

DS-71

DS-71 bit string

Mask of Failure Alarm.

Corresponds bit for bit to the FAILED_ACTIVE. A bit on means that the failure is masked out from alarming.

ENUM

Enumerated list of advisory conditions within a device. All open bits are free to be used as appropriate for each specific device.

ENUM

Designates the alarming priority of the

MAINT_ALM.

bit string bit string

VARIABLE unsigned8

13

13

13

4

4

4

1

D

D

D

S

S

D

S

—

—

—

R/W

R/W

0 R

0 R

0 R

Same as OD Index 43

Same as OD Index 43

Same as OD Index 43

0 R/W 0 — 15

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

202

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

Table C-1

Resource block parameters continued

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

Parameter Mnemonic

MAINT_ENABLE

MAINT _MASK

MAINT _ACTIVE

ADVISE_PRI

ADVISE_ENABLE

ADVISE _MASK

ADVISE _ACTIVE

Definition

Message

Type

Data Type/

Structure

Enabled MAINT_ALM alarm conditions.

Corresponds bit for bit to the MAINT_ACTIVE. A bit on means that the corresponding alarm condition is enabled and will be detected. A bit off means the corresponding alarm condition is disabled and will not be detected.

ENUM

Mask of Maintenance

Alarm. Corresponds bit for bit to the MAINT_ACTIVE.

A bit on means that the failure is masked out from alarming.

ENUM bit string bit string

Enumerated list of advisory conditions within a device. All open bits are free to be used as appropriate for each specific device

ENUM

Designates the alarming priority of the

ADVISE_ALM.

bit string

VARIABLE unsigned8 bit string Enabled ADVISE_ALM alarm conditions.

Corresponds bit for bit to the ADVISE_ACTIVE. A bit on means that the corresponding alarm condition is enabled and will be detected. A bit off means the corresponding alarm condition is disabled and will not be detected.

ENUM

Mask of Advisory

Alarm.Corresponds bit for bit to the

ADVISE_ACTIVE. A bit on means that the failure is masked out from alarming.

ENUM bit string

Enumerated list of advisory conditions within a device. All open bits are free to be used as appropriate for each specific device

ENUM bit string

Size

4

4

4

1

4

4

4

S

S

D

S

S

S

D

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

R

R

R

R/W

R

R

R

Enumerated List of

Values

Same as OD Index 43

Same as OD Index 43

Same as OD Index 43

0 — 15

Same as OD Index 43

Same as OD Index 43

Same as OD Index 43

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

(1) The initial value is based on transmitter software version 4.0. If the transmitter contains a later version of software, the initial value may be different.

C.2

Resource block views

Table C-2 lists the views for the resource block. The Fieldbus Foundation defines the views as:

• View 1 – View object defined to access the dynamic operating parameters of a block

• View 2 – View object defined to access the static operating parameters of a block.

• View 3 – View object defined to access all the dynamic parameters of a block.

• View 4 – View object defined to access static parameters not included in View 2.

The number in the cell represents the size of the parameter in bytes. Each view can only contain a total of 122 bytes of data. Each view must start with ST_REV.

Configuration and Use Manual

203

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

Table C-2

Resource block views

38

39

40

41

34

35

36

37

30

31

32

33

26

27

28

29

42

43

44

45

46

22

23

24

25

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

OD

Index

1

SHED_RCAS

SHED_ROUT

FAULT_STATE

SET_FSTATE

CLR_FSTATE

MAX_NOTIFY

LIM_NOTIFY

CONFIRM_TIME

WRITE_LOCK

UPDATE_EVT

BLOCK_ALM

ALARM_SUM

ACK_OPTION

WRITE_PRI

WRITE_ALM

ITK_VER

FD_VER

FD_FAIL_ACTIVE

FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE

FD_MAINT_ACTIVE

FD_CHECK_ACTIVE

Parameter Mnemonic

ST_REV

TAG_DESC

STRATEGY

ALERT_KEY

MODE_BLK

BLOCK_ERR

RS_STATE

TEST_RW

DD_RESOURCE

MANUFAC_ID

DEV_TYPE

DEV_REV

DD_REV

GRANT_DENY

HARD_TYPES

RESTART

FEATURES

FEATURE_SEL

CYCLE_TYPE

CYCLE_SEL

MIN_CYCLE_T

MEMORY_SIZE

NV_CYCLE_T

FREE_SPACE

FREE_TIME

204

4

4

4

4

View 1

2

View 2

2

View 3

2

View 3_1

2

View 4

2

View 4_1 View 4_2

2 2

2

1

4

2

1

4

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

4

2

2

4

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

1 1

1

1

4

1

8 8

2

2

2

1

4

4

4

4

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

Table C-2

Resource block views continued

84

85

86

87

80

81

82

83

76

77

78

79

72

73

74

75

88

89

90

91

92

68

69

70

71

64

65

66

67

60

61

62

63

56

57

58

59

52

53

54

55

48

49

50

51

OD

Index

47

View 1

2

4

DEV_OPTIONS

OUTPUT_BOARD_SN

FINAL_ASSY_NUM

DOWNLOAD_MODE

HEALTH_INDEX

FAILED_PRI

RECOMMENDED_ACTION

FAILED_ALM

MAINT _ALM

ADVISE _ALM

FAILED_ENABLE

FAILED_MASK

FAILED_ACTIVE

MAINT_PRI

MAINT_ENABLE

MAINT _MASK

MAINT _ACTIVE

ADVISE_PRI

ADVISE_ENABLE

ADVISE _MASK

ADVISE _ACTIVE

Totals

Parameter Mnemonic

FD_FAIL_MAP

FD_OFFSPEC_MAP

FD_MAINT_MAP

FD_CHECK_MAP

FD_FAIL_MASK

FD_OFFSPEC_MASK

FD_MAINT_MASK

FD_CHECK_MASK

FD_FAIL_ALM

FD_OFFSPEC_ALM

FD_MAINT_ALM

FD_CHECK_ALM

FD_FAIL_PRI

FD_OFFSPEC_PRI

FD_MAINT_PRI

FD_CHECK_PRI

FD_SIMULATE

FD_RECOMMEN_ACT

FD_EXTENDED_ACTIVE

FD_EXTENDED_MAP

COMPATIBILITY_REV

HARDWARE_REVISION

SOFTWARE_REV

PD_TAG

DEV_STRING

44

View 2 View 3 View 3_1 View 4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

View 4_1 View 4_2

30

9

2

4

1

54

2

4

4

4

16

1

1

1

1

4

73

4

4

4

32

32

78

1

1

4

4

1

4

4

4

4

29

Configuration and Use Manual

205

Model 2700 Resource Block Reference

206

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Appendix D

Flowmeter installation types and components

D.1

Installation diagrams

Model 2700 transmitters can be installed in four different ways:

• Integral

• 4-wire remote

• 9-wire remote

• Remote core processor with remote transmitter

See Figure D-1.

D.2

Component diagrams

Figure D-2 shows the transmitter and core processor components in integral installations.

Figure D-3 shows the transmitter components in 4-wire remote installations and remote core

processor with remote transmitter installations.

Figure D-4 shows the transmitter/core processor assembly in 9-wire remote installations.

In remote core processor with remote transmitter installations, the core processor is installed

stand-alone. See Figure D-5.

D.3

Wiring and terminal diagrams

In 4-wire remote and remote core processor with remote transmitter installations, a 4-wire cable is

used to connect the core processor to the transmitter’s mating connector. See Figure D-6.

In 9-wire remote installations, a 9-wire cable is used to connect the junction box on the sensor to the

terminals on the transmitter/core processor assembly. See Figure D-8.

Figure D-9 shows the transmitter’s power supply terminals.

Figure D-9 shows the output terminals for the Model 2700 transmitter.

Configuration and Use Manual

207

Flowmeter installation types and components

Figure D-1

Installation types

Integral

Transmitter

Core processor

(standard only)

Sensor

4-wire remote

Transmitter

Sensor

208

9-wire remote

Core processor

(standard or enhanced)

Sensor

Remote core processor with remote transmitter

Sensor

Junction box

Junction box

4-wire cable

Transmitter

Core processor

(standard only)

9-wire cable

Transmitter

4-wire cable

Core processor

(standard only)

9-wire cable

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Flowmeter installation types and components

Figure D-2

Transmitter and core processor components – Integral installations

Transmitter

Transition ring

4 X Cap screws (4 mm)

Base

Core processor

Sensor

Figure D-3

Transmitter components, junction end-cap removed – 4-wire remote and remote core processor with remote transmitter installations

–

Ground lug

Main enclosure

Conduit opening for 4-wire cable

Mounting bracket

4 X Cap screws

(4 mm)

Junction end-cap

Junction housing

Mating connector

Mating connector socket

Configuration and Use Manual

209

Flowmeter installation types and components

Figure D-4

Transmitter/core processor assembly exploded view – 9-wire remote installations

Transmitter

Core processor

4 X Cap screws (4 mm)

Core processor housing

Conduit opening for 9-wire cable

Mounting bracket

End-cap

Figure D-5

Remote core processor components

Conduit opening for 4-wire cable

Conduit opening for 9-wire cable

Mounting bracket

Core processor lid

4 X Cap screws (4 mm)

Core processor housing

End-cap

210

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Flowmeter installation types and components

Figure D-6

4-wire cable between Model 2700 transmitter and standard core processor

Core processor terminals

User-supplied or factory-supplied 4-wire cable

VDC+ (Red)

RS-485/B (Green)

Mating connector

(transmitter)

RS-485/A (White)

VDC– (Black)

Figure D-7

4-wire cable between Model 2700 transmitter and enhanced core processor

Core processor terminals

User-supplied or factory-supplied 4-wire cable

RS-485/A (White)

RS-485/B (Green)

Mating connector

(transmitter)

VDC– (Black)

VDC+ (Red)

Configuration and Use Manual

211

Flowmeter installation types and components

Figure D-8

9-wire cable between sensor junction box and core processor

9-wire cable

to sensor junction box

9-wire terminal connections

(core processor)

Black

(Drains from all wire sets)

Green

White

Brown

Violet

Yellow

Black

Brown

Red

Blue

Gray

Orange

Violet

Yellow

Plug and socket

Mounting screw

Ground screw

Red

Green

White

Blue

Gray

Orange

Figure D-9

Output and power supply terminals

Fieldbus terminals

2

1

9 (–, N)

10 (+, L)

Equipment ground

7

Service port

8

212

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Appendix 2

Connecting with the Field Communicator

2.1

Overview

The Field Communicator is a handheld configuration and management tool for F

OUNDATION fieldbus-compatible devices, including the Micro Motion Model 2700 transmitter. This appendix provides basic information for connecting the Field Communicator to your transmitter.

The instructions in this manual assume that users are already familiar with the Communicator and can perform the following tasks:

• Turn on the Communicator

• Navigate the Communicator menus

• Transmit and receive configuration information between the Communicator and F

OUNDATION fieldbus-compatible devices

• Use the alpha keys to type information

If you are unable to perform the tasks listed above, consult the Communicator manual before attempting to use the Communicator. The documentation is available on the Micro Motion web site

(www.micromotion.com).

Note: In this manual, procedures identified as performed with a fieldbus host can be accomplished with a Field Communicator.

2.2

Viewing the device descriptions

To access all of the features of the Model 2700 transmitter with F

OUNDATION

fieldbus, the Field

Communicator must have the correct device description (DD). DD files are available in the Products section of the Micro Motion web site (www.micromotion.com).

To view the Model 2700 device descriptions that are installed on your Field Communicator:

1. In the Foundation fieldbus application menu, choose

Utility

, then

Available Device

Descriptions List

.

2. Expand the

Micro Motion, Inc.

branch, then expand the

2000

branch.

3. If you do not have a

Dev Rev 6

device description installed, you will need to obtain it in order to use the functionality described in this manual. Contact Micro Motion.

2.3

Connecting to a transmitter

The Field Communicator can be connected directly to a fieldbus segment. Figures 2-1 and 2-2

illustrate two examples for connecting the Communicator to a segment.

Configuration and Use Manual

213

Connecting with the Field Communicator

Figure 2-1

Bench connection example

Transmitter

Terminator

+

–

+ –

+

–

Connection block

+

–

Terminator

Communicator

+

–

Fieldbus power conditioner

24 VDC power supply

Figure 2-2

Field connection example

Transmitters

Fieldbus power conditioner

Fieldbus host control system

24 VDC power supply

Terminator

+

–

Fieldbus junction box

Terminator

Communicator

214

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Appendix 3

Connecting with ProLink II

3.1

Overview

ProLink II is a Windows-based configuration and management tool for Micro Motion transmitters. It provides complete access to transmitter functions and data.

This chapter provides basic information for connecting ProLink II to your transmitter. The following topics and procedures are discussed:

•

Requirements (see Section 3.2)

•

Configuration upload/download (see Section 3.3)

•

Connecting to a Model 2700 transmitter (see Section 3.4)

The instructions in this manual assume that users are already familiar with ProLink software. For more information on using ProLink, see the ProLink User manual.

3.2

Requirements

To use ProLink II with a Model 2700 transmitter, you will need:

• An RS-485 to RS-232 signal converter, to convert the PC port’s signal to the signal used by the transmitter. For computers without serial ports, certain USB to RS-232 converters can be used in conjunction with the RS-232 to RS-485 converter. Both types of converter are available from Micro Motion.

• 25-pin to 9-pin adapter (if required by your PC)

Note: If you are using the enhanced core processor and you connect directly to the core processor’s

RS-485 terminals (see Appendix D) instead of to the transmitter, ProLink II v2.4 or later is required.

This connection type is sometimes used for troubleshooting.

3.3

ProLink II configuration upload/download

ProLink II provides a configuration upload/download function which allows you to save configuration sets to your PC. This allows:

• Easy backup and restore of transmitter configuration

• Easy replication of configuration sets

Micro Motion recommends that all transmitter configurations be downloaded to a PC as soon as the configuration is complete.

To access the configuration upload/download function:

1. Connect ProLink II to your transmitter as described in this chapter.

Configuration and Use Manual

215

Connecting with ProLink II

2. From the

File

menu:

• To save a configuration file to a PC, use the

Load from Xmtr to File

option.

• To restore or load a configuration file to a transmitter, use the

Send to Xmtr from File

option.

3.4

Connecting from a PC to a Model 2700 transmitter

You can temporarily connect a PC to the transmitter’s service port. The service port is located within the transmitter wiring compartment, beneath the intrinsic safety cover.

Figure 3-1

Service port

Intrinsic safety cover

216

Service port (7,8)

3.4.1

Connecting to the service port

To temporarily connect to the service port, which is located in the non-intrinsically safe power-supply compartment:

1. Attach the signal converter to the serial or USB port of your PC, using a 25-pin to 9-pin adapter if required.

2. Open the cover to the intrinsically safe wiring compartment.

WARNING

Opening the wiring compartment in a hazardous area can cause an explosion.

Because the wiring compartment must be open to make this connection, the service port should be used only for temporary connections, for example, for configuration or troubleshooting purposes.

When the transmitter is in an explosive atmosphere, do not use the service port to connect to the transmitter.

3. Open the power supply compartment.

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Connecting with ProLink II

WARNING

Opening the power supply compartment can expose the operator to electric shock.

To avoid the risk of electric shock, do not touch the power supply wires or terminals while using the service port.

4. Connect the signal converter leads to the service port terminals.

Figure 3-2

Connecting to the service port

RS-485B

RS-485A

Service port

25 to 9 pin serial port adapter (if necessary)

RS-485 to RS-232 signal converter

5. Start ProLink II. Choose

Connection > Connect to Device

. In the screen that appears, specify:

•

Protocol

: Service Port

•

COM Port

: as appropriate for your PC

All other parameters are set to service port required values and cannot be changed.

6. Click

Connect

.

7. If an error message appears: a.

Swap the leads between the two service port terminals and try again.

b.

Ensure that you are using the correct COM port.

c.

Check all the wiring between the PC and the transmitter.

Configuration and Use Manual

217

Connecting with ProLink II

3.5

ProLink II language

ProLink II can be configured for the following languages:

• English

• French

• German

To configure the ProLink II language, choose

Tools > Options

. In this manual, English is used as the

ProLink II language.

218

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Appendix 4

Using the display

4.1

Overview

This appendix describes the basic use of the display and provides a menu tree for the display. You can use the menu tree to locate and perform display commands quickly.

Note that Model 2700 transmitters can be ordered with or without displays. Not all configuration and use functions are available through the display. If you need the added functionality, or if your transmitter does not have a display, you must use either a fieldbus host or ProLink II.

4.2

Components

Figure 4-1 illustrates the display components.

Figure 4-1

Display components

Current value

Process variable line

Indicator light

Scroll optical switch

Units of measure

Select optical switch

4.3

Using the optical switches

The

Scroll

and

Select

optical switches are used to navigate the display menus. To activate an optical switch, touch the lens in front of the optical switch or move your finger over the optical switch close to the lens. There are two optical switch indicators: one for each switch. When an optical switch is activated, the associated optical switch indicator is a solid red.

Configuration and Use Manual

219

Using the display

CAUTION

Attempting to activate an optical switch by inserting an object into the opening can damage the equipment.

To avoid damage to the optical switches, do not insert an object into the openings.

Use your fingers to activate the optical switches.

4.4

Using the display

The display can be used to view process variable data or to access the transmitter menus for configuration or maintenance.

4.4.1

Display language

The display can be configured for the following languages:

• English

• French

• Spanish

• German

Due to software and hardware restrictions, some English words and terms may appear in the non-English display menus. For a list of the codes and abbreviations used on the display, see

Table 4-1.

For information on configuring the display language, see Section 4.18.6.

In this manual, English is used as the display language.

4.4.2

Viewing process variables

In ordinary use, the

Process variable

line on the LCD panel shows the configured display variables, and the

Units of measure

line shows the measurement unit for that process variable.

•

See Section 4.18.5 for information on configuring the display variables.

•

See Table 4-1 for information on the codes and abbreviations used for display variables.

If more than one line is required to describe the display variable, the

Units of measure

line alternates between the measurement unit and the additional description. For example, if the LCD panel is displaying a mass inventory value, the

Units of measure

line alternates between the measurement unit (for example,

G

) and the name of the inventory (for example,

MASSI

).

Auto Scroll may or may not be enabled:

• If Auto Scroll is enabled, each configured display variable will be shown for the number of seconds specified for Scroll Rate.

• Whether Auto Scroll is enabled or not, the operator can manually scroll through the configured display variables by activating

Scroll

.

For more information on using the display to manage totalizers and inventories, see Chapter 5.

220

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Using the display

4.4.3

Using display menus

Note: The display menu system provides access to basic transmitter functions and data. It does not provide access to all functions and data. To access all functions and data, use a fieldbus host or

ProLink II

To enter the display menu system:

1. Activate

Scroll

and

Select

simultaneously.

2. Hold

Scroll

and

Select

until the words

SEE ALARM

or

OFF-LINE MAINT

appear.

Note: Access to the display menu system may be enabled or disabled. If disabled, the OFF-LINE

MAINT option does not appear. For more information, see Section 4.18.1.

If no optical switch activity occurs for two minutes, the transmitter will exit the off-line menu system and return to the process variable display.

To move through a list of options, activate

Scroll

.

To select from a list or to enter a lower-level menu, scroll to the desired option, then activate

Select

. If a confirmation screen is displayed:

• To confirm the change, activate

Select

.

• To cancel the change, activate

Scroll

.

To exit a menu without making any changes:

• Use the

EXIT

option if available.

• Otherwise, activate

Scroll

at the confirmation screen.

4.4.4

Display password

A password can be used to control access to either the off-line maintenance menu, the alarm menu, or both. The same code is used for both:

• If both passwords are enabled, the user must enter the password to access the top-level off-line menu. The user can then access either the alarm menu or the off-line maintenance menu without re-entering the password.

• If only one password is enabled, the user can access the top-level off-line menu, but will be prompted for the password when he or she attempts to access the alarm menu or the off-line maintenance menu (depending on which password is enabled). The user can access the other menu without a password.

• If neither password is enabled, the user can access all parts of the off-line menu without a password.

For information about enabling and setting the display password, refer to Section 4.18.

Note: If the petroleum measurement application is installed on your transmitter, the display password is always required to start, stop, or reset a totalizer, even if neither password is enabled. If the petroleum measurement application is not installed, the display password is never required for these functions, even if one of the passwords is enabled.

If a password is required, the word

CODE?

appears at the top of the password screen. Enter the digits of the password one at a time by using

Scroll

to choose a number and

Select

to move to the next digit.

If you encounter the display password screen but do not know the password, wait 30 seconds without activating any of the display optical switches. The password screen will timeout automatically and you will be returned to the previous screen.

Configuration and Use Manual

221

Using the display

4.4.5

Entering floating-point values with the display

Certain configuration values, such as meter factors or output ranges, are entered as floating-point values. When you first enter the configuration screen, the value is displayed in decimal notation (as

shown in Figure 4-2) and the active digit is flashing.

Figure 4-2

Numeric values in decimal notation

SX.XXXX

Sign

For positive numbers, leave this space blank. For negative numbers, enter a minus sign (–).

Digits

Enter a number (maximum length: eight digits, or seven digits and a minus sign).

Maximum precision is four.

222

To change the value:

1.

Select

to move one digit to the left. From the leftmost digit, a space is provided for a sign. The sign space wraps back to the rightmost digit.

2.

Scroll

to change the value of the active digit:

1

becomes

2

,

2

becomes

3

, …,

9

becomes

0

,

0

becomes

1

. For the rightmost digit, an

E

option is included to switch to exponential notation.

To change the sign of a value:

1.

Select

to move to the space that is immediately left of the leftmost digit.

2. Use

Scroll

to specify – (for a negative value) or [blank] (for a positive value).

In decimal notation, you can change the position of the decimal point up to a maximum precision of four (four digits to the right of the decimal point). To do this:

1.

Select

until the decimal point is flashing.

2.

Scroll.

This removes the decimal point and moves the cursor one digit to the left.

3.

Select

to move one digit to the left. As you move from one digit to the next, a decimal point will flash between each digit pair.

4. When the decimal point is in the desired position,

Scroll.

This inserts the decimal point and moves the cursor one digit to the left.

To change from decimal to exponential notation (see Figure 4-3):

1.

Select

until the rightmost digit is flashing.

2.

Scroll

to

E

, then

Select

. The display changes to provide two spaces for entering the exponent.

3. To enter the exponent: a.

Select

until the desired digit is flashing.

b.

Scroll

to the desired value. You can enter a minus sign (first position only), values between 0 and 3 (for the first position in the exponent), or values between 0 and 9 (for the second position in the exponent).

c.

Select

.

Note: When switching between decimal and exponential notation, any unsaved edits are lost. The system reverts to the previously saved value.

Note: While in exponential notation, the positions of the decimal point and exponent are fixed.

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Using the display

Figure 4-3

Numeric values in exponential notation

SX.XXXEYY

Sign

Digit (0–9)

Digits

Enter a four-digit number; three digits must fall to the right of the decimal point.

E

Exponent indicator

Sign or Digit (0–3)

To change from exponential to decimal notation:

1.

Select

until the

E

is flashing.

2.

Scroll

to

d

.

3.

Select

. The display changes to remove the exponent.

To exit the menu:

• If the value has been changed,

Select

and

Scroll

simultaneously until the confirmation screen is displayed.

—

Select

to apply the change and exit.

—

Scroll

to exit without applying the change.

• If the value has not been changed,

Select

and

Scroll

simultaneously until the previous screen is displayed.

Configuration and Use Manual

223

Using the display

4.5

Abbreviations

The display uses a number of abbreviations. Table 4-1 lists the abbreviations used by the display.

Table 4-1 Display codes and abbreviations

Abbreviation

FAC Z

FCF

FLDIR

GSV

GSV F

GSV I

GSV T

INTERN

LANG

LOCK

ACK ALARM

ACK ALL

ADDR

AUTO SCRLL

AVE_D

AVE_T

BRD_T

BKLT

CAL

CHANGE CODE

CODE

CONC

CONFG

CORE

CUR Z

DENS

DGAIN

DISBL

DRIVE%

DSPLY

ENABL

ENABLE ACK

ENABLE ALARM

ENABLE AUTO

ENABLE OFFLN

ENABLE PASSW

ENABLE RESET

ENABLE START

EXT_P

EXT_T

EXTRN

Definition

Acknowledge alarm

Acknowledge all alarms

Address

Auto scroll

Average density

Average temperature

Board temperature

Backlight

Calibrate

Change display password

Display password

Concentration

Configure (or configuration)

Core processor

Current zero

Density

Drive gain

Disable

Drive gain

Display

Enable

Enable the ACK ALL function

Enable the alarm menu

Enable auto scroll

Enable the offline menu

Enable the display password

Enable resetting of totals

Enable stopping/starting of totals

External pressure

External temperature

External

Factory zero

Flow calibration factor

Flow direction

Gas standard volume

Gas standard volume flow

Gas standard volume inventory

Gas standard volume total

Internal

Language

Write protect

Abbreviation

PASSW

PRESS

PWRIN r.

RDENS

RPO_A

SGU

SIM

SPECL

STD M

STD V

STDVI

TCDENS

TCORI

TCORR

TCVOL

TEMPR

TUBEF

VER

VERFY

VFLOW

VOL

WRPRO

WTAVE

XMTR

LPO_A

LVOLI

LZERO

MAINT

MASS

MASSI

MFLOW

MSMT

MTR F

MTR_T

NET M

NET V

NETMI

NETVI

OFFLN

Definition

Left pickoff amplitude

Volume inventory

Live zero flow

Maintenance

Mass flow

Mass inventory

Mass flow

Measurement

Meter factor

Case temperature (T-Series only)

CM net mass flow rate

CM net volume flow rate

CM net mass inventory

CM net volume inventory

Offline

Password

Pressure

Input voltage

Revision

Density at reference temperature

Right pickoff amplitude

Specific gravity units

Simulated

Special

Standard mass flow rate

Standard volume flow rate

Standard volume inventory

Temperature-corrected density

Temperature-corrected inventory

Temperature-corrected total

Temperature-corrected volume

Temperature

Raw tube frequency

Version

Verify

Volume flow

Volume flow

Write protect

Weighted average

Transmitter

224

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

Appendix 5

NE53 history

This appendix documents the change history of the Model 2700 transmitter with F

OUNDATION fieldbus software.

5.1

Software change history

Operating instructions are English versions. Instructions in other languages have different part numbers but matching revision letters.

Table 5-1.

Software version 1.0

Date Changes to software

09/2000 Initial product release

Operating instructions

20000326 Rev. A

Table 5-2.

Software version 2.0

Date Changes to software

Operating instructions

06/2001 Software expansion:

• Support to configure the process variable units for mass flow, volume flow, density and temperature from the display.

Software adjustment:

• Clarified the interaction of the digital fault setting and the last measured value timeout.

Feature additions:

• Backup link active scheduler (LAS)

• PID function block

• Analog output function block for pressure compensation

• Support for pressure compensation to the transducer block

• Drive gain as a selectable channel for AI blocks

• Ability to enable fieldbus simulate mode through the service port

20000326 Rev. B

Table 5-3.

Software version 2.2

Date Changes to software

02/2002 Software adjustments:

• Improved handling of RS-485 communication via the service port

• Improved display

Feature additions:

• Protections against low power conditions

Configuration and Use Manual

Operating instructions

20000326 Rev. C

225

NE53 history

Table 5-4.

Software version 3.x

Date Changes to software

07/2004 Software expansions:

• Software version information available via the display or Modbus

• Totalizers can be disabled in addition to start/stop

• Doubled the number of virtual communication relationships (VCRs)

Software adjustments:

• Improved handling of AI block status when slug flow is detected

• Some fieldbus parameters made persistent across power resets

• Introduced finer-grained control over operator access to display functions

Feature additions:

• Petroleum measurement application

• Gas standard volume functionality

• Enhanced density application

• Support for enabling fieldbus simulation mode via the display

• Support for 32-character tagnames configurable via Modbus

• Support for Analog Input Block configurable via Modbus

Operating instructions

20000326 Rev. D

Table 5-5.

Software version 4.0

Date Changes to software

06/2007 Software expansions:

• Temperature and density units added to API transducer block

• Additional configuration ability for the display

Feature additions:

• Configurable alarm severity

• Additional support for gas standard volume functionality

• Meter verification as an option

• Multiple display language selections

• PlantWeb Alerts II

• Ability to enable simulate mode through the Device Information Transducer Block

• Default value for AI1 block: mass flow in g/s

• Default value for AI2 block: temperature in °C

• Default value for AI3 block: density in g/cm

3

• Default value for AI4 block: volume flow in l/s

Operating instructions

20000326 Rev. E

Table 5-6.

Software version 5.0

Date Changes to software

01/2008 Software adjustments:

• Improved handling of Gas Standard Volume cutoffs

• Improved local display functionality for API and concentration measurement variables

Feature additions:

• Support for Meter Verification AMS Snap-On

• Extra security for local display off-line menu access

Operating instructions

20000326 Rev. EA

226

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

NE53 history

Table 5-7.

Software version 5.1

Date Changes to software

03/2009 Software adjustments:

• Resolved non-volatile memory (NVM) reliability issue present in version 4.0 and 5.0 software

Operating instructions

20000326 Rev. EA

Table 5-8.

Software version 6.0

Date Changes to software

06/2010 Software adjustments:

• Smart Meter Verification

• Improved representation of gas volume on local display

• Harmonized behavior of gas volume density parameter with other gas

• standard volume parameters

Operating instructions

20000326 Rev. EA

Configuration and Use Manual

227

Table 5-9.

Software version 7.0

Date Changes to software

Operating instructions

01/2013 Software adjustments:

• Release of new firmware and hardware for MVD 2700 transmitter with Foundation

Fieldbus tested for ITK6.0.1. The version of new firmware is 7.00 and hardware revision is ‘AA’.

Feature additions:

• Two Analog Output (AO) function blocks. One AO block can be assigned to Pressure

Compensation Variable Channel where as other AO block can be assigned to any of the Transducer Block Compensation Variable Channels

• One Discrete Input (DI) and one Discrete Output (DO) function block

• One channel for temperature compensated data in transducer block

• Additional channels in the transducer block for Discrete Output variables. The following variables can be assigned to Discrete Output Block.

— Start Sensor Zero

— Reset Mass Total

— Reset API Reference (Standard) Volume Total

— Reset All Totals

— Reset ED Reference Volume Total

— Reset ED Net Mass Total

— Reset ED Net Volume Total

— Start/Stop All Totals

— Increment ED Curve

— Reset Gas Standard Volume Total

— Start Meter Verification in Continuous Measurement Mode

• Live software download through FOUNDATION Fieldbus segment is supported

• PlantWeb Field Diagnostic (FD) is supported –t he diagnostic information is based on

NAMUR NE 107 standard. AMS v12 will be supporting NE 107

• Link Master Functionality is supported

• The following functionality:

— Auto commission

— Auto replacement

• The following alarms:

— A128 = Transmitter Factory configuration data invalid

— A129 = Transmitter factory configuration data checksum invalid

• Fault Disconnection Electronics (FDE)

• Support for the following Function Blocks:

— Resource Block = 1

— Transducer Block = 1

— Analog Input Blocks = 4

— Analog Output Blocks = 2

— Discrete Input Block = 1

— Discrete Output Block = 1

— PID Block = 1

— Integrator Block = 1

20020223 Rev. AA

Table 5-10. Software version 7.1

Date Changes to software

09/2013 Firmware adjustments:

• Release adds support for new IR detector hardware on the display

Operating instructions

20020223 Rev. AA

228

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

NE53 history

Table 5-11. Software version 7.20

Date Changes to firmware

01/2014 Firmware adjustments:

• Fixes BAD-PV reporting at the fieldbus host

Operating instructions

20020223 Rev. AA

Table 5-12. Software version 8.0

Date Changes to firmware

01/2013 Firmware adjustments:

• When the Integrator function block is set for internal mass total, the RESET_IN stops the total but does not reset the internal total

• The XD_ERROR parameter has incorrect values in every transducer block

• PlantWeb alerts are inconsistent and duplicated

• Six Micro Motion alerts are not mapped to PlantWeb alerts

• In auto mode, it is not possible to abort Smart Meter Verification

• Device Descriptor shows wrong default value

• The Smart Meter Verification count is not incremented when the test is initiated from coil 190

• “Loading SW” message is not shown on display while upgrading firmware in device

Feature additions:

• Support added for Compact Density Meter (CDM), Fork Density Meter (FDM), and

Fork Viscosity Meter (FVM) — supported as core processors

• FOUNDATION Fieldbus stack upgraded to TH6.04

• Plantweb alerts are replaced by NE107 field diagnostics

• The following new channels added for Analog Input (AI) function block to support the

CDM, FDM, and FVM:

— User-Defined Calculations (Channel No 37)

— Sensor Time Period (Upper) (Channel No 38)

— Sensor Time Period (Channel No 39)

— Tube-Case Temperature Differential (Channel No 40)

— Dynamic Viscosity (Channel No 41)

— Kinematic Viscosity (Channel No 42)

— Base Viscosity (Channel No 43)

— Quality Factor (Channel No 44)

— Velocity (Channel No 45)

— CCAI (Channel No 46)

— CII (Channel No 47)

• Support for the following function blocks:

— Analog Input Blocks = 4 (Execution time 19 msec each)

— Analog Output Blocks = 2 (Execution time 18 msec each)

— Discrete Input Block = 1 (Execution time 16 msec)

— Discrete Output Block = 1 (Execution time 16 msec)

— PID Block = 1 (Execution time 20 msec)

— Integrator Block = 1 (Execution time 18 msec)

Operating instructions

20020223 Rev. AA

Configuration and Use Manual

229

NE53 history

230

Model 2700 Transmitters with F

OUNDATION

™

fieldbus

*20000326*

20000326

Rev. EC

2016

Micro Motion Inc. USA

Worldwide Headquarters

7070 Winchester Circle

Boulder, Colorado 80301

T +1 303-527-5200

T +1 800-522-6277

F +1 303-530-8459

www.micromotion.com

Micro Motion Europe

Emerson Automation Solutions

Neonstraat 1

6718 WX Ede

The Netherlands

T +31 (0) 704136666

F +31 (0) 318 495 556

www.micromotion.nl

Micro Motion Asia

Emerson Automation Solutions

1 Pandan Crescent

Singapore 128461

Republic of Singapore

T +65 6777-8211

F +65 6770-8003

Micro Motion United Kingdom

Emerson Automation Solutions

Emerson Process Management Limited

Horsfield Way

Bredbury Industrial Estate

Stockport SK6 2SU U.K.

T +44 0870 240 1978

F +44 0800 966 181

Micro Motion Japan

Emerson Automation Solutions

1-2-5, Higashi Shinagawa

Shinagawa-ku

Tokyo 140-0002 Japan

T +81 3 5769-6803

F +81 3 5769-6844

©2016 Micro Motion, Inc. All rights reserved.

The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson

Electric Co. Micro Motion, ELITE, ProLink, MVD and MVD Direct

Connect marks are marks of one of the Emerson Automation

Solutions family of companies. All other marks are property of their respective owners.